3-074-375-12 (1)
Dig it a l
Vid e o Ca m e ra
Re co rd e r
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,
and retain it for future reference.
Owner’s Record
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.
Model No. DCR-TRV
Model No. AC-
Serial No.
Serial No.
TM
SERIES
DCR-TRV50
DCR-TRV40/TRV50
©2002 Sony Corporation
IMPORTANT NOTE
Fo r cu st o m e rs in CANADA
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
requirements, the following antenna
installation and device operating
configurations must be satisfied: the antenna
has been installed by the
“ Me m o ry St ick”
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
manufacturer and no changes can be made.
The term “IC:” before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
“ Me m o ry St ick”
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
—
—
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
—
—
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/ TV technician for help.
The supplied interface cable must be used with
the equipment in order to comply with the
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
3
Ma in fe a t u re s
• Recording moving pictures on a
tape (p. 26)
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s
o r st ill im a g e s, a n d p la yin g
t h e m b a ck
• Recording still images on a tape
(p. 52)
• Playing back a tape (p. 40)
• Recording still images on
“Memory Stick”s (p. 47, 126)
• Recording moving pictures on
“Memory Stick”s (p. 144)
• Viewing still images recorded on
“Memory Stick”s (p. 156)
• Viewing moving pictures on
“Memory Stick”s (p. 159)
• Viewing images recorded on
“Memory Stick”s using the USB cable
(p. 190, 195)
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n yo u r
co m p u t e r
• Viewing moving pictures recorded on
tapes using the USB cable (p. 185)
• Capturing images on your computer
from your camcorder using the USB
cable (p. 187)
• Converting an analog signal into
digital to capture images onto your
computer (p. 196)
4
Ma in fe a t u re s
Acce ssin g t h e In t e rn e t via a
Blu e t o o t h e q u ip p e d d e vice
(DCR-TRV50 o n ly)
Accessing the Internet, sending/
receiving your e-mail. For details,
refer to the Network Function
Operating Instructions supplied
with your camcorder. (DCR-
TRV50 only) (p. 197)
Ot h e r u se s
Functions for adjusting exposure in the recording mode
• BACK LIGHT (p. 34)
• NightShot/ Super NightShot/ Color Slow Shutter (p. 34)
• Recording images with the flash (p. 49, 130)
• PROGRAM AE (p. 64)
• Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 67)
• Flexible Spot Meter (p. 68)
Functions for giving images more impact
• Digital zoom (p. 31)
The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 10×, select the digital zoom power in
D ZOOM in the menu settings.)
• Fader (p. 57)
• Picture effect (p. 60)
• Digital effect (p. 61)
• Titles (p. 110)
• MEMORY MIX (p. 139)
Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings
• Manual focus (p. 69)
• Sports lesson (p. 64)
• Landscape (p. 64)
• Spot Focus (p. 71)
Functions for using after recording
• END SEARCH/ EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review (p. 38)
• DATA CODE (p. 42)
• Tape PB ZOOM (p. 77)
• ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 79)
• TITLE SEARCH (p. 80)
• Digital program editing (p. 89, 151)
5
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s
Using the spot light-metering
Ma in fe a t u re s ..................................... 4
– Flexible Spot Meter ..................... 68
Focusing manually ................................ 69
Using the spot focus – Spot Focus ...... 71
Interval recording ................................. 72
Frame by frame recording
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e
– Recording on a tape ............................. 8
– Recording on a “Memory Stick” ...... 10
– Frame recording .......................... 74
Ge t t in g St a rt e d
Using this manual ................................. 12
Checking supplied accessories ............ 14
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ... 15
Installing the battery pack ............ 15
Charging the battery pack ............. 16
Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 19
Step 2 Setting the date and time ........ 20
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ................... 23
Step 4 Using the touch panel .............. 24
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck
Op e ra t io n s
Playing back tapes with picture effect
........................................................... 75
Playing back tapes with digital effect
........................................................... 76
Enlarging images recorded on tapes
– Tape PB ZOOM ........................... 77
Quickly locating a scene
– ZERO SET MEMORY ................. 79
Searching the boundaries of recorded
tape by title – TITLE SEARCH ..... 80
Searching a recording by date
– DATE SEARCH ........................... 81
Searching for a photo – PHOTO
SEARCH/ PHOTO SCAN ............. 83
Re co rd in g – Ba sics
Recording a picture............................... 26
Shooting backlit subjects
– BACK LIGHT ........................ 34
Shooting in the dark
– NightShot/ Super NightShot/
Color Slow Shutter .................. 34
Self-timer recording ....................... 37
Checking recordings
Ed it in g
Dubbing a tape ...................................... 86
Dubbing only desired scenes
– Digital program editing (on tapes)
........................................................... 89
Recording video or TV programs ..... 100
Inserting a scene from a VCR
– Insert Editing ............................. 104
Audio dubbing .................................... 106
Superimposing a title ......................... 110
Making your own titles ...................... 113
Labeling a cassette .............................. 115
– END SEARCH/
EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review .......... 38
Pla yb a ck – Ba sics
Playing back a tape ............................... 40
To display the screen indicators
– Display function ................... 42
Viewing the recording on TV .............. 46
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g
Op e ra t io n s
“ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s
Recording still images on a “Memory
Stick” during tape recording ........ 47
Recording still images on a tape
– Tape Photo recording ................. 52
Adjusting the white balance manually
........................................................... 54
Using the wide mode ........................... 55
Using the fader ...................................... 57
Using special effects
– Picture effect ................................. 60
Using special effects
– Digital effect ................................. 61
Using the PROGRAM AE .................... 64
Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 67
Using a “Memory Stick”
– Introduction ............................... 117
Recording still images on
“Memory Stick”s
– Memory Photo recording ......... 126
Recording images from a tape as
still images ..................................... 135
Superimposing a still image in the
“Memory Stick” on an image
– MEMORY MIX .......................... 139
Recording moving pictures on
“Memory Stick”s
– MPEG movie recording ............ 144
6
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s
Recording pictures from tape as a
moving picture ............................. 147
Recording edited pictures from a
tape as a moving picture
Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n
(DCR-TRV50 o n ly)
Accessing the network ....................... 197
For the details, refer to the Network
Function Operating Instructions
supplied with your camcorder.
– Digital program editing
(on “Memory Stick”s) .................. 151
Copying still images from a tape
– PHOTO SAVE ............................ 154
Viewing still images
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r
Changing the default settings with
the menu ........................................ 199
– Memory Photo playback .......... 156
Viewing moving pictures
– MPEG movie playback ............. 159
Copying images recorded on
Tro u b le sh o o t in g
“Memory Stick”s to tape ............. 162
Enlarging still images recorded on
“Memory Stick”s
– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 164
Playing back images in a continuous
loop – SLIDE SHOW .................... 166
Preventing accidental erasure
– Image protection ........................ 167
Deleting images – DELETE ............... 168
Writing a print mark
Types of trouble and how to correct
trouble ............................................ 210
Self-diagnosis display ......................... 217
Warning indicators and messages .... 218
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n
Usable cassettes ................................... 220
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery
pack ................................................ 223
About i.LINK ....................................... 225
Using your camcorder abroad .......... 227
Maintenance information and
– PRINT MARK ............................ 171
Using the optional printer ................. 172
precautions .................................... 228
Specifications ....................................... 234
Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g yo u r
Co m p u t e r
Qu ick Re fe re n ce
Viewing images on your computer
– Introduction ............................... 174
Connecting your camcorder to your
computer using the USB cable
– For Windows users ................... 177
Viewing images recorded on a tape
on your computer
Identifying parts and controls ........... 236
Index ..................................................... 245
– For Windows users ................... 185
Viewing images recorded on a
“Memory Stick” on your
computer
– For Windows users ................... 190
Connecting your camcorder to your
computer using the USB cable
– For Macintosh users .................. 193
Viewing images recorded on a
“Memory Stick” on your computer
– For Macintosh users .................. 195
Capturing images from an analog
video unit on your computer
– Signal convert function ............. 196
7
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a t a p e
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to recorded
pictures on tapes of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses
“( )” for more information.
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 19)
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).
Open the DC
IN jack cover.
AC power adaptor (supplied)
Connect the plug with its v
mark facing up.
In se rt in g a ca sse t t e (p . 23)
2 Push the center of
the cassette back to
insert the cassette.
Insert the cassette
straight as far as
possible into the
cassette
3 Close the cassette
1 Slide
OPEN/
EJECT in the
compartment by
pressing
on the
direction of the
arrow and open the
lid.
cassette
compartment.
After the cassette
compartment goes
down completely,
close the lid until it
clicks.
compartment with
the window facing
up.
8
Re co rd in g a p ict u re (p . 26)
1Remove the lens cap.
2Set the POWER
switch to CAMERA
while pressing the
small green button.
3Press OPEN to
open the LCD
panel.
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
The picture
appears on the
screen.
MEMORY/
NETWORK
4Press START/ STOP. Your
View finder
camcorder starts recording. To
stop recording, press START/
STOP again.
When the LCD panel is closed,
use the viewfinder with your eye
against the eyecup.
Adjust the viewfinder lens to
your eyesight (p. 30).
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date
and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD
scre e n (p . 40)
2Press m to rewind the tape.
VCR
1Set the POWER switch
OFF(CHG)
to VCR while pressing
CAMERA
the small green button.
MEMORY/
NETWORK
REW
3Press N to start playback.
PLAY
NOTE
Do not pick up your camcorder by
holding the viewfinder, the flash,
the LCD panel or the battery pack.
9
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a
“Memory Stick” of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses
“( )” for more information.
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 19)
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).
Open the DC IN
jack cover.
AC power adaptor (supplied)
Connect the plug with its v
mark facing up.
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 119)
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the B mark
facing up as illustrated.
“Memory Stick” slot
B mark
Press the “Memory Stick”
once lightly to eject it.
10
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e o n “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 126)
2Set the POWER switch
to MEMORY/
1Remove the lens cap.
NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) while
pressing the small green
button.
Make sure that the
LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock)
position.
3Press OPEN
to open the
LCD panel.
The picture
appears on
the screen.
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
View finder
When the LCD panel is closed,
use the viewfinder with your
eye against the eyecup.
Adjust the viewfinder lens to
your eyesight (p. 30).
4Press PHOTO
5Press PHOTO
lightly.
deeper.
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date
and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e o n t h e LCD
scre e n (p . 156)
1Set the POWER
switch to MEMORY/
NETWORK
(DCR-TRV50 only)
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
or VCR while
pressing the small
green button.
2Press PLAY or
PB. The last recorded
image is displayed.
or
PLAY
PB
NOTE
Do not pick up your camcorder by
holding the viewfinder, the flash,
the LCD panel or the battery pack.
11
— Ge t t in g St a rt e d —
Usin g t h is m a n u a l
The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before
you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number
by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV50 is the model used for
illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any
differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, “DCR-TRV50
only”.
As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in
capital letters.
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is
being carried out.
Types of differences
DCR-
TRV40
MEMORY
—
TRV50
Mark on the POWER switch
Network function
MEMORY/ NETWORK
z
z
Provided
—
Not provided
No t e o n Ca sse t t e Me m o ry
Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can use only mini DV cassettes with
your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory
.
Functions that require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has a
cassette memory are:
– End search (p. 38)
– Date search (p. 81)
– Photo search (p. 83)
Functions you can operate only with the cassette memory are:
– Title search (p. 80)
– Superimposing a title (p. 110)
– Labeling a cassette (p. 115)
For details of cassette types, see page 220.
You see this mark in the introduction of features that are operated only with
cassette memory.
Cassettes with cassette memory are marked by
(Cassette Memory).
12
Usin g t h is m a n u a l
No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s
TV color systems differ depending on the country or region. To view your recordings
on a TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV.
Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s
Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the copyright laws.
Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re
Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r (o n m o u n t e d m o d e ls o n ly)
• The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision
technology, so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.
How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,
blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.
These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the
recording in any w ay.
• Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea
water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.
Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].
• Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a
car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].
• Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD
screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause
malfunctions [c].
• Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.
Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
[d ]
13
Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.
1
4
9
2
7
qs
3
8
qd
5
q;
6
qa
1 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC pow er
7 Lens cap (1) (p. 26)
adaptor (1), pow er cord (1) (p. 16)
2 NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (p. 15, 16)
3 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 46)
8 Lens hood (1) (p. 30)
9 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 117)
0 USB cable (1) (p. 180)
4 Wireless Remote Commander (1)
qa CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB Driver) (1)
(p. 242)
(p. 179)
5 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote
qs Cleaning cloth (1) (p. 229)
Commander (2) (p. 243)
qd Stylus (1) (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198)
6 Shoulder strap (1)
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a
malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.
14
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
In st a llin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.
1
2
To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT
down.
1
2
BATT release
button
2
If you use the large capacity battery pack
If you install the NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91 battery pack on your camcorder,
extend its viewfinder.
15
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.
Your camcorder operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series).
See page 223 for details of “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with
your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plug’s v mark facing up.
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.
(3) Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery
time is indicated in minutes on the display window.
When the remaining battery indicator changes to
, normal charge is completed. To
fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour
after normal charge is completed until FULL appears in the display window. Fully
charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.
2
1
4
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.
16
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Note
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of
the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power
adaptor.
Remaining battery time indicator
The remaining battery time indicator in the display window indicates the approximate
recording time with the viewfinder.
Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time
“---- min” appears in the display window.
When you use the AC pow er adaptor
Place the AC power adaptor near a wall outlet. If any trouble occurs with this unit,
disconnect the plug from a wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.
Ch a rg in g t im e
Battery pack
NP-FM50 (supplied)
NP-FM70
Full charge (Normal charge)
150 (90)
240 (180)
NP-QM71
260 (200)
NP-FM90
330 (270)
NP-FM91/ QM91
360 (300)
Approximate minutes at 25°C (77°F) to charge an empty battery pack
The charging time may increase if the battery’s temperature is extremely high or low
because of the ambient temperature.
Re co rd in g t im e
Recording w ith
the view finder
Recording w ith
the LCD screen
Battery pack
Continuous
Typical*
80
Continuous
Typical*
60
NP-FM50 (supplied)
NP-FM70
145
305
355
460
535
105
225
265
345
400
175
130
NP-QM71
205
150
NP-FM90
265
200
NP-FM91/ QM91
310
230
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery
* Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/
stop, zooming and turning the power on/ off. The actual battery life may be shorter.
17
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Pla yin g t im e
Playing time
w ith LCD closed
Playing time
on LCD screen
Battery pack
NP-FM50 (supplied)
NP-FM70
200
415
485
630
725
135
285
335
435
505
NP-QM71
NP-FM90
NP-FM91/ QM91
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery
Note
Approximate recording time and continuous playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery
life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.
If the pow er goes off although remaining battery time indicator indicates that the
battery pack has enough pow er to operate
Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining
indicator is correct.
Recommended charging temperature
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).
What is ”InfoLITHIUM”?
The “InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack that can exchange data such as
battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible
with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with
the “InfoLITHIUM” battery. “InfoLITHIUM” M series battery packs have the
mark.
TM
SERIES
“InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
18
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly
Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t
When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a
wall outlet using the AC power adaptor.
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover. Connect the AC power adaptor supplied with
your camcorder to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plug’s v mark
facing up.
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.
1
2,3
PRECAUTION
The set is not disconnected from the AC power supply (wall outlet) as long as it is
connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.
Notes
• The AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your
camcorder.
• The DC IN jack has “source priority.” This means that the battery pack cannot supply
any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power
cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.
Using a car battery
Use Sony Car Battery Adaptor (optional).
Refer to the operating instructions of the Car Battery Adaptor for further information.
19
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e
Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. “CLOCK SET”
will be displayed each time that you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) unless you set the date and time settings.
If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time may be
cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable battery
installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 231).
Set the area, the daylight saving time, year, month, day, hour and then the minute, in
that order.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50
only), then press MENU to display the menu settings.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired area (where you are), then
press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select whether or not the time is daylight
saving time, then press the dial.
Select OFF if the time is not daylight saving time. Select ON if it is.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired year, then press the dial.
The year changes as follows:
1995 T · · · · t 2002 T · · · · t 2079
(7) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and
pressing the dial.
(8) Set the minute by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by
the time signal. The clock starts to move.
(9) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.
20
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e
SETUP MENU
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
USB STREAM
LTR SIZE
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
STBY
– –:– –:– –
2
3
4
6
8
CLOCK SET
USB STREAM
LTR SIZE
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
USB STREAM
LTR SIZE
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
STBY
– –:– –:– –
CLOCK SET
AREA
R
1
GMT +0.0
Lisbon, London
r
DST OFF
DATE
Y
M
D
– – – – – – – – – – : – –
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
EXEC NEXT ITEM
CLOCK SET
AREA26
CLOCK SET
AREA26
5
R
GMT –5.0
GMT –5.0
NewYork, Bogota
NewYork, Bogota
r
DST OFF
DATE
DST OFF
ON
Y
M
D
DATE
Y
M
D
– – – – – – – – – – : – –
– – – – – – – – – – : – –
[
] :
EXEC NEXT ITEM
[
] :
EXEC NEXT ITEM
CLOCK SET
CLOCK SET
AREA26
R
R
AREA26
GMT –5.0
GMT –5.0
NewYork, Bogota
NewYork, Bogota
r
r
DST OFF
DST OFF
DATE RY R M R D
DATE RY R M R D
R
R
R
R
R
R
:
:
2002 JAN
1
12 00AM
2002 JAN
1
12 00AM
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
[
] :
EXEC NEXT ITEM
[
] :
EXEC NEXT ITEM
CLOCK SET
AREA26
SETUP MENU
STBY
2002
R
GMT –5.0
JUL
5:30:00 PM
4
CLOCK SET
USB STREAM
LTR SIZE
NewYork, Bogota
r
DST OFF
LANGUAGE
DEMO MODE
RETURN
DATE RY R M R D
R
R
R
:
2002 JUL
4
5
30PM
r
r
r
r
r
r
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
EXEC END
Note
Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.
If you do not set the date and time
“--:--:--” and “--- -- ----” are recorded on the data code of the tape and the “Memory
Stick.”
When using your camcorder abroad
Set the clock to the local time (p. 22).
If you use the camcorder in a region w here summer time is used
Set DST SET to ON in the menu setting.
Note on the time indicator
The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.
• 12:00 AM stands for midnight.
• 12:00 PM stands for noon.
21
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e
Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y a t im e d iffe re n ce
You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select AREA
SET, DST SET* in the menu settings. See page 208 for more information.
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.
Wo rld t im e d iffe re n ce s
1920 21 22 23 2425 26 272930 31 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 121314 16 17 18
Time
difference
Area or country
Time
difference
Area or country
AREA
AREA
GMT
Lisbon, London
Berlin, Paris
+11:00
+12:00
–12:00
–11:00
–10:00
–09:00
–08:00
–07:00
–06:00
–05:00
–04:00
–03:30
–03:00
–02:00
–01:00
Solomon Is
1
2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
+01:00
+02:00
+03:00
+03:30
+04:00
+04:30
+05:00
+05:30
+06:00
+06:30
+07:00
+08:00
+09:00
+09:30
+10:00
Fiji, Wellington
Eniwetok, Kwajalein
Midway Is., Samoa
Hawaii
Helsinki, Cairo
Moscow, Nairobi
Tehran
3
4
5
6
Abu Dhabi, Baku
Kabul
Alaska
LosAngeles, Tijuana
Denver, Arizona
Chicago, MexicoCity
New York, Bogota
Santiago
7
8
Karachi, Islamabad
Calcutta, New Delhi
Almaty, Dhaka
Rangoon
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Bangkok, Jakarta
HongKong, Singapore
Seoul, Tokyo
St. John’s
Brasilia, Montevideo
Fernando de Noronha
Azores
Adelaide, Darwin
Melbourne, Sydney
To adjust a time difference
Select AREA SET in the menu setting, and select an area or a country you want to adjust
to, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
22
St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e
(1) Prepare the power supply.
(2) Slide
OPEN/ EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid.
The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.
(3) Push the center of the cassette back to insert.
Insert the cassette straight as far as possible into the cassette compartment with
the window facing up.
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing
on the cassette compartment.
The cassette compartment automatically goes down.
(5) After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it
clicks.
2
3, 4
OPEN/ EJECT
5
To e je ct a ca sse t t e
Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.
Notes
• Do not press the cassette compartment down forcibly. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
• The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the cassette
compartment other than the
mark.
When you use a cassette w ith cassette memory
Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 220).
To prevent accidental erasure
Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.
23
St e p 4 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l
Your camcorder has operation buttons on the LCD screen.
Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV50
only) to operate each function. This section describes how to operate the touch panel
during recording or playing back images on a tape.
(1) Prepare the power supply (p. 15 to 19).
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) while pressing the small green button.
(4) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(5) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(6) Press a desired operation item. Refer to relevant pages of this manual for each
function.
5,6
4
3
When the POWER switch
is set to CAMERA
VCR
PAGE1 PAGE2
EXIT
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
FN
MEMORY/
NETWORK
END
SCH
SPOT DIG
FOCUS EFFT
MEM
M I X METER
SPOT
PAGE1 PAGE2
EXIT
LCD
BRT
SELF
TIMER
2
1
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To e xe cu t e se t t in g s
Press
OK. The display returns to PAGE1/ PAGE2.
To ca n ce l se t t in g s
Press
OFF to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2.
24
St e p 4 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l
Notes
• When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the
LCD panel from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index
finger.
• Do not press the LCD screen with sharp-pointed objects other than the stylus
supplied. (DCR-TRV50 only)
• Do not press the LCD screen too hard.
• Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.
• If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You
can control the display with DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder.
• When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is
required (CALIBRATION) (p. 230).
• When the LCD screen gets dirty, use the supplied cleaning cloth.
When executing each item
The green bar appears above the item.
If the items are not available
The color of the items changes to gray.
Press FN to display the follow ing buttons:
When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA
PAGE1
PAGE2
END SCH, SPOT FOCUS, DIG EFFT, MEM MIX, SPOT METER
LCD BRT, SELFTIMER
When the POWER switch is set to VCR
PAGE1
PAGE2
LCD BRT,
PB, INDEX, END SCH
PB, INDEX, DATA CODE
DIG EFFT, PB ZOOM,
See page 120 when the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50
only).
25
— Re co rd in g – Ba sics —
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.
(1) Remove the lens cap by pressing both knobs on its sides and pull the lens cap
string to fix it.
(2) Prepare the power supply and insert a cassette. See “Step 1” to “Step 3” for
more information (p. 15 to 23).
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.
This sets your camcorder to the standby.
(4) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The viewfinder automatically turns off.
(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator
appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder
lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.
3
1
LOCK sw itch
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
4
Microphone
Camera recording
lamp
2
5
REC 0:00:01
40min
26
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Notes
• Fasten the grip strap firmly.
• The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote
Commander for this operation (p. 42).
Note on recording
Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 206). In the LP mode, you can
record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode.
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing
back the tape on your camcorder.
Note on the LOCK sw itch
When you slide the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set
to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to
the left as the default setting.
To enable smooth transition
Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as
you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.
However, check the following:
– Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape.
– When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
– When you use a cassette with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition
smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the END SEARCH (p. 38).
If you leave your camcorder in the standby for five minutes w hile the cassette is
inserted
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent
battery and tape wear. To return to the standby, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)
and then back to CAMERA. To start recording, press the START/ STOP button again
without switching the POWER switch. However, your camcorder does not turn off
automatically while the cassette is not inserted.
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record in the LP
mode
• The transition between scenes may not be smooth.
• The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly
between scenes.
The battery use time w hen you record using the LCD screen
The battery time is slightly shorter than the shooting time using the viewfinder.
27
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Aft e r re co rd in g
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
(2) Close the LCD panel.
(3) Eject the cassette.
(4) Remove the battery pack.
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n
The LCD panel can be opened up to 90 degrees.
The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to
the lens side.
180°
90°
When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically, and swing it into the camcorder body.
Note
When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder automatically
turns off (p. 32).
LCD screen
• When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight, the LCD screen may be
difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder.
• When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up
to 90 degrees.
28
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50
only). Press FN and select PAGE2.
When you set the POWER switch to VCR, press FN to display PAGE1 (p. 24).
(2) Press LCD BRT. The screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen appears.
(3) Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen using –/ +.
– : To dim
+ : To brighten
(4) Press
OK to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2.
1
2,3
FN
LCD
BRT
OK
LCD BRT
–
+
the bar indicator
OPEN
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
LCD screen backlight
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings
when using the battery pack (p. 202).
29
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r
If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the images in the viewfinder come
into sharp focus.
Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.
The view finder lens
adjustment lever
View finder backlight
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select VF B.L. in the menu settings
when using the battery pack (p. 202).
At t a ch in g t h e su p p lie d le n s h o o d
To record fine pictures under strong light, we recommend attaching the lens hood. Also
the lens cap can be attached even with the lens hood on.
Note
You cannot attach filters or other objects onto the lens hood.
If you forcibly attach these objects onto the lens hood, you will no longer be able to
remove filters or other objects from the hood.
When you use the filter (optional)
The shadow of the lens hood may appear in the corners of the screen.
30
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re
Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.
Using the zoom sparingly results in better-looking recordings.
W : Wide-angle (subject appears farther away)
T : Telephoto (subject appears closer)
W
W
T
T
T
W
To use zoom greater than 10×
Zoom greater than 10× is performed digitally. Digital zoom can be set to 20× or 120×.
To activate digital zoom, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu
settings (p. 201). The digital zoom is set to OFF as a default setting.
W
T
The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming
zone.
The digital zooming zone appears when you select
the digital zoom power in the menu settings.
When you shoot close to a subject
If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the “W” side until the
focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/ 8 inch)
away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/ 2 inch)
away in the wide-angle position.
Note on digital zoom
The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the “T”
side.
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
You cannot use the digital zoom.
31
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Sh o o t in g w it h t h e Mirro r Mo d e
This feature allows the camera subject to view him-or herself on the LCD screen.
The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you
look at the subject in the viewfinder.
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
Rotate the LCD screen 180 degrees.
The
indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen.
Xz appears in the standby, and z appears in the recording. Some of other indicators
appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed.
Picture in the mirror mode
The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal
when recorded.
During recording in the mirror mode
• ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work.
• FN appears mirror-reversed in the viewfinder.
When you press FN
The
does not appear on the screen.
32
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d in t h e re co rd in g
Indicators are not recorded on tapes.
Remaining battery time
Cassette memory
This appears when using a cassette with cassette memory.
Recording mode
STBY/REC
REC 0:00:01
45min
50min
Time code/Tape counter
Remaining tape
This appears after you insert a cassette and record or
play back for a while.
JUL
4
2002
12:05:56PM
FN
FN button
Press this button to display operation buttons on the
LCD screen.
Time
The time is displayed about five seconds after the
power is turned on.
Date
The date is displayed about five seconds after the
power is turned on.
Remaining battery time indicator during recording
The remaining battery time indicator roughly indicates the continuous recording time.
The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are
recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute
for the correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.
Time code
The time code indicates the recording or playback time, “0:00:00” (hours : minutes :
seconds) in CAMERA and “0:00:00:00” (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR.
You cannot rewrite only the time code.
Remaining tape indicator
The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.
Recording data
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote
Commander for this operation (p. 42).
33
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Sh o o t in g b a cklit su b je ct s – BACK LIGHT
When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a
light background, use the backlight function.
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only),
press BACK LIGHT.
The . indicator appears on the screen. To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.
BACK LIGHT
When shooting backlit subjects
If you press EXPOSURE or SPOT METER, the backlight function will be canceled
(p. 68).
Sh o o t in g in t h e d a rk
– Nig h t Sh o t /Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t /Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t
The NightShot enables you to shoot a subject in a dark place. For example, you can
satisfactorily record the environment of nocturnal animals for observation when you
use this function.
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only),
slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.
The
and “NIGHTSHOT” indicators flash on the screen. To cancel the NightShot,
slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.
NIGHTSHOT
OFF
ON
COLOR SLOW S
SUPER NS
NightShot Light emitter
34
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Usin g Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t
The Super NightShot makes subjects more than 16 times brighter than those recorded in
the NightShot.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. The
and
“NIGHTSHOT” indicators flash on the screen.
(2) Press SUPER NS. The
and “SUPER NIGHTSHOT” indicators flash on the
screen.
To return the NightShot, press SUPER NS again.
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t Lig h t
The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable the NightShot Light,
set N.S. LIGHT in
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)
Usin g Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r
The Color Slow Shutter enables you to record color images in a dark place.
(1) Slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.
(2) Press COLOR SLOW S.
The
and COLOR SLOW SHUTTER indicators flash on the screen.
To cancel the Color Slow Shutter, press COLOR SLOW S again.
Notes
• Do not use the NightShot in bright places (e.g. the outdoors in the daytime). This may
cause your camcorder to malfunction.
• When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in normal recording, the picture may be
recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors.
• If focusing is difficult when using the NightShot, focus manually.
While using the NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:
– Exposure
– PROGRAM AE
– White balance
– HOLOGRAM AF
While using the Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. At this time,
moving pictures may slow down.
While using the Super NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:
– Fader
– Digital effect
– PROGRAM AE
– Exposure
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording
standby
– White balance
– Flexible Spot Meter
– Spot Focus
– Recording with the flash
35
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
You cannot use the following functions:
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
NightShot Light
NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting distance
using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet).
While using the Color Slow Shutter, you cannot use the follow ing functions:
– Fader
– Digital effect
– PROGRAM AE
– Exposure
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording
standby
– Flexible Spot Meter
– Spot Focus
– Recording with the flash
In total darkness
The Color Slow Shutter may not work normally.
36
Re co rd in g a p ict u re
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g
Recording with the self-timer starts in 10 seconds automatically. You can also use the
Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2 (p. 24).
(2) Press SELFTIMER.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(3) Press START/ STOP.
The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts
automatically.
START/STOP
1
FN
START/STOP
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n
Press START/ STOP.
To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r
Press SELFTIMER so that the
(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen while
your camcorder is in the standby. You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote
Commander.
Note
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:
– The self-timer recording is finished.
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
You can also record still images on “Memory Stick”s with the self-timer (p. 134).
37
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s
– END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Re c Re vie w
You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition
between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth.
FN
EDITSEARCH
END SEARCH
You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.
(1) In the standby, press FN to display PAGE1 (p. 24).
(2) Press END SCH.
The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your
camcorder returns to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker
or headphones.
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To st o p se a rch in g
Press END SCH again.
EDITSEARCH
You can search for the next recording start point.
Hold down the EDITSEARCH in the standby. The recorded portion is played back.
7 – : To go backward
+
: To go forward
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/ STOP, recording begins
from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.
38
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s – END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Re c Re vie w
Re c Re vie w
You can check the last recorded section.
Press the 7 – side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in the standby.
The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few seconds, and
then your camcorder will return to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the
speaker or headphones.
End search
When you use a cassette without cassette memory, the end search function does not
work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a
cassette with cassette memory, the end search works even once you eject the cassette.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The end search may not work correctly.
39
— Pla yb a ck – Ba sics —
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
You can monitor the playback picture on the screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can
monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can control playback using the
Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert the recorded tape.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.
(3) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.
(5) Press N to start playback.
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.
– : To turn down
+ : To turn up
When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted.
6
2
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
VOLUME
MEMORY/
NETWORK
3
1
4
5
REW
PLAY
To st o p p la yb a ck
Press x.
40
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
When monitoring on the LCD screen
You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the
LCD screen facing out.
If you leave the pow er on for a long time
Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.
When you open or close the LCD panel
Make sure that the LCD panel is set vertically.
41
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs – Disp la y fu n ct io n
Press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder or DISPLAY on the Remote
Commander supplied with your camcorder. The indicators disappear on the screen. To
make the indicators appear, press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL or DISPLAY again.
DISPLAY
DATA CODE
DISPLAY/
TOUCH PANEL
Ab o u t d a t e /t im e a n d va rio u s se t t in g s
Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the
recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) (data code).
Follow the steps below to display the data code using the touch panel or the Remote
Commander.
Using the touch panel
1 Set the POWER sw itch to VCR, then play back a tape.
2 Press FN and select PAGE2.
3 Press DATA CODE.
DATACODE
OFF
OK
CAM
DATE
DATA DATA
4 Select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then press
OK.
5 Press EXIT.
Using the Remote Commander
Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander in the playback.
The display changes as follows when you press the DATA CODE on the Remote
Commander:
date/ time t various settings (SteadyShot, exposure, white balance, gain, shutter
speed, aperture value) t no indicator
42
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
Date/time
Various settings
0:00:23:01
40min
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
[d ]
0:00:23:01
50min
AUTO
60 AWB
JUL
4
2002
[e ]
[f]
12:05:56 AM
F1.8
9dB
[g ]
[a ] Tape counter
[b ] SteadyShot OFF
[c] Exposure mode
[d ] White balance
[e ] Gain
[f] Shutter speed
[g ] Aperture value
To not display various settings
Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 208).
The display changes as follows when you press DATA CODE on the Remote
Commander:
date/ time y no indicator
Various settings
Various settings are your camcorder’s information when you have recorded. In the
recording, the various settings will not be displayed.
When you use the data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if:
– A blank portion of the tape is being played back.
– The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.
– The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.
Data code
When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code appears on the TV screen.
Remaining battery time indicator during playback
The indicator indicates the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may
not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you
close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct
remaining battery time to be displayed.
43
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s
To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.
To p la y b a ck p a u se (vie w in g a st ill p ict u re )
Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X.
To a d va n ce t h e t a p e
Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.
To re w in d t h e t a p e
Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.
To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n
Press
on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction.
To resume normal playback, press N.
To lo ca t e a sce n e m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )
Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the
button.
To m o n it o r h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re s w h ile a d va n cin g o r re w in d in g
t h e t a p e (skip sca n )
Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume
rewinding or advancing, release the button.
To vie w t h e p ict u re a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)
Press y on the Remote Commander during playback. For slow playback in the reverse
direction, press
, then press y on the Remote Commander. To resume normal
playback, press N.
To vie w p ict u re s a t d o u b le sp e e d
Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the
reverse direction, press
normal playback, press N.
, then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume
To vie w p ict u re s fra m e -b y-fra m e
Press C on the Remote Commander in the playback pause. For frame-by-frame
playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.
To se a rch t h e la st sce n e re co rd e d (END SEARCH)
Press FN, then press END SCH in the stop mode. The last five seconds recorded portion
is played back and then stopped.
44
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e
In the various playback modes
• Sound is muted.
• The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.
When the playback pause lasts for five minutes
Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N.
Slow playback
The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder. However, this
function does not work for an output signal through the DV IN/ OUT jack.
When you play back a tape in reverse
Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is
not a malfunction.
45
Vie w in g t h e re co rd in g o n TV
Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder to watch playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video
control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the screen.
When monitoring playback pictures on the TV screen, we recommend that you power
your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor (p. 19). Refer to the
operating instructions of your TV.
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/ VCR selector on the TV to VCR.
AUDIO/VIDEO
S VIDEO
White
IN
Yellow
S VIDEO
VIDEO
TV
AUDIO
: Signal flow
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
Red
If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o a VCR
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/ V connecting
cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.
If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. If you connect the
white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the sound is R
(right) signal.
If your TV has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With
this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your
camcorder and the TV.
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.
To display the screen indicators on TV
Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings (p. 209).
Then, press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder. To turn the screen
indicators off, press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder again.
46
— Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g
You can record still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording
standby. You can also record still images on a tape (p. 52).
Before operation
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder (p. 119).
• Set PHOTO REC in
to MEMORY in the menu settings (The default setting is
MEMORY).
(1) In the standby, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears. The
CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still
image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold
PHOTO lightly.
(2) Press PHOTO deeper.
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the
“Memory Stick.”
[a ][b ]
1
SFN
1 / 6
CAPTURE
640
PHOTO
SFN
640
2
PHOTO
[a ]: Number of recorded images
[b ]: Approximate number of images that
can be recorded on the “Memory
Stick”
Notes
• Do not shake or strike your camcorder when you record still images.
The image may fluctuate.
• You cannot record still images on a “Memory Stick” during following operations
(
indicator flashes on the screen.):
– Wide mode
– Fader
– Picture effect
– Digital effect
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
– MEMORY MIX
“Memory Stick”
For details, see page 117 for more information.
47
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g
Image size of still images
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.
When you want to record still images in different size, use the Memory Photo recording
(p. 126).
When the POWER sw itch is set to CAMERA
You cannot select image quality.
The image quality when you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) is used. (The default setting is SUPER FINE).
During and after recording still images on a “Memory Stick”
Your camcorder continues recording on tape.
To record still images using the Remote Commander
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records the
image on the screen.
To record still images on a “Memory Stick” during tape recording
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The image when
you press PHOTO will be recorded on the “Memory Stick.”
To record images w ith higher quality
We recommend that you use the Memory Photo recording (p. 126).
Title
The title cannot be recorded.
48
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh
The flash pops up automatically. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To change
the flash mode, press the (flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator appears on
the screen.
(flash)
Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:
t
t
t No indicator
Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce red-eye.
Forced flash:
No flash:
The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness.
The flash does not fire.
The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change
FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 200). Try recording
various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.
Notes
• Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light
from the flash or cause lens shadow to appear.
• You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.
•
(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on
individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-
recording flash or other conditions.
• A flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location.
• When you record images with the flash, sound may not be recorded clearly.
• When recording with the flash, it takes longer to prepare for image capture. This is
because your camcorder starts to charge power for firing after the flash pops up.
Darken the surroundings by covering the lens, and press PHOTO lightly so that your
camcorder starts to charge power after the flash pops up.
• If it is not easy to focus on the subject automatically, for example, when recording in
the dark, use the focal distance information (p. 70) for focusing manually.
When you record images w ith the flash
The allowed shooting distance is shorter than when you record on a “Memory Stick” in
Memory Photo recording.
49
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g
If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after disconnecting the
pow er supply
Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto).
You cannot shoot images w ith the flash during the follow ing operations:
– Fader
– Recording
The flash does not fire even if you select auto (no indicator) and
reduction) during the follow ing operations:
– Exposure
(auto red-eye
– Flexible Spot Meter
– NightShot
– Spotlight of PROGRAM AE
– Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE
– Landscape of PROGRAM AE
When you use an external flash (optional) w hich does not have the auto red-eye
reduction
You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction.
50
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” d u rin g t a p e re co rd in g
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g
You can record still images on “Memory Stick”s with the self-timer. You can also use
the Remote Commander for this operation.
Before operation
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder (p. 119).
• Set PHOTO REC in
to MEMORY in the menu settings.(The default setting is
MEMORY.)
(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2.
(2) Press SELFTIMER.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.
The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then the recording starts
automatically.
PHOTO
1
FN
3
PHOTO
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r
Press SELFTIMER so that the
(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen while
your camcorder is in the standby. You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote
Commander.
Note
The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:
– The self-timer recording is finished.
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
Self-timer recording
You can operate the self-timer recording only during the recording standby.
51
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e
– Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g
You can record still images such as photographs on tapes.
You can record about 510 images in the SP mode and about 765 images in the LP mode
on a 60-minute tape.
(1) In the standby, set PHOTO REC in
to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 201).
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears.
The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet.
To change the still image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then
press and hold PHOTO lightly.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.
The still image on the screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound
during those seven seconds is also recorded.
The still image is displayed on the screen until recording is completed.
CAPTURE
2
PHOTO
•••••••
3
PHOTO
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh
For the details, see page 49.
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h se lf-t im e r
(1) Set PHOTO REC in
to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 201).
(2) Follow steps 1 and 3 on page 51.
52
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e – Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g
Notes
• During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.
• When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. The image may fluctuate.
• You cannot use PHOTO during the following operations (
indicator flashes on
the screen):
– Fader
– Digital effect
If you record a moving subject w ith the tape photo recording
When you play back the still image on other equipment, the image may fluctuate.
This is not a malfunction.
To use the tape photo recording w ith the Remote Commander
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder records an image on the
screen immediately.
To use the tape photo recording during the normal camera recording
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO
deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds, and your camcorder
returns to the standby.
To record clear still images w ith little unsteadiness
We recommend that you record on “Memory Stick”s using the Memory Photo
recording.
When playing back images recorded w ith the flash on other equipment
These images may flicker.
53
Ad ju st in g t h e w h it e b a la n ce m a n u a lly
You can manually adjust and set the white balance. This adjustment makes white
subjects look white and allows more natural color balance. Normally white balance is
automatically adjusted.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50
only). Press MENU, then select WHT BAL in
dial (p. 200).
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired white balance, then press
dial.
HOLD :
Recording a single-colored subject or background
OUTDOOR :
• When recording a sunset/ sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon
signs, or fireworks
• Under a color-matching fluorescent lamp
n INDOOR :
• Where lighting condition changes quickly
• Excessively bright places such as studios
• Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps
1
MANUAL SET
EFFECT
FLASH LVL
WHT BAL
N.S. LIGHT
STBY
P
AUTO
HOLD
AUTO SHTR OUTDOOR
RETURN
INDOOR
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic w h it e b a la n ce
Set WHT BAL to AUTO in the menu settings.
If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting
We recommend that you record in the INDOOR.
When you record under fluorescent lighting
Use the automatic white balance or HOLD.
Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in the INDOOR.
In the automatic w hite balance
Point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER
switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:
– You detach the battery for replacement.
– You take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house holding the exposure, or vice
versa.
In the HOLD w hite balance
Set the white balance to AUTO and reset to HOLD after a few seconds when:
– You change the PROGRAM AE.
– You take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house, or vice versa.
54
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e
You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).
If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1/ ID-2 system, the screen size is
automatically selected.
Black bands appear on the screen during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a ]. The picture
during playback on a normal TV [b ] or on a wide-screen TV [c] is compressed in the
longwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode,
you can watch pictures of normal images [d ].
[b ]
[a ]
16:9WIDE
[c]
[d ]
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
16:9WIDE in , then press the dial (p. 201).
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
2
CAMERA SET
D
ZOOM
PHOTO REC
16:9WIDE
ON
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
INT. REC
RETURN
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e
Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.
55
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e
In the w ide mode
You cannot select the following functions:
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording
standby
– OLD MOVIE
– BOUNCE
During recording
You cannot select or cancel the wide mode. When you cancel the wide mode, set your
camcorder to the standby and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.
Connection for a TV
Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full
size when:
– You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2)
system.
– You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on the TV.
ID-1 system
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio (screen horizontal/ vertical ratio) information (16:9,
4:3, or letter box) with video signals.
ID-2 system
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between
video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using an A/ V
connecting cable.
56
Usin g t h e fa d e r
You can fade in or out to give your recording a more professional appearance.
[a ]
STBY
REC
FADER
M. FADER
(mosaic)
BOUNCE1) 2)
OVERLAP2)
WIPE2)
DOT2)
[b ]
STBY
REC
MONOTONE
When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.
When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.
1) You can use the bounce when D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu settings.
2) Fade in only.
57
Usin g t h e fa d e r
(1) When fading in [a ]
In the standby, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.
When fading out [b ]
In the recording, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.
The indicator changes as follows:
FADER t M. FADER t BOUNCE t MONOTONE
(no indicator)T
DOT
T
WIPE
T
OVERLAP
The last selected fader is indicated first of all.
(2) Press START/ STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing.
After fade in/ out ends, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal
mode.
START/STOP
1
FADER
FADER
To ca n ce l t h e fa d e r
Before pressing START/ STOP, press FADER until the indicator disappears.
Note
You cannot use the following functions while using the fader. Also, you cannot use the
fader while using the following functions:
– Digital effect
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
– Tape photo recording
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording
standby
– Recording with the flash
– Interval recording
– Frame recording
When you select OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT
Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. While the image is
being stored, the indicators flash fast, and the playback picture disappears. At this
stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape condition.
58
Usin g t h e fa d e r
When you set the POWER sw itch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
You cannot use the fader.
While using the bounce, you cannot use the follow ing functions:
– Focus
– Zoom
– Picture effect
– Exposure
– Flexible Spot Meter
Note on the bounce
The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following mode or functions:
– When D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings
– Wide mode
– Picture effect
– PROGRAM AE
59
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Pict u re e ffe ct
You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.
NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.
SEPIA :
The picture appears in sepia.
B&W :
The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).
SOLARIZE [b ] : The light intensity becomes clearer, to make the picture look more like
an illustration.
SLIM [c] :
STRETCH [d ] : The picture expands horizontally.
PASTEL [e ] : The contrast of the picture is emphasized, to make the picture look
more like an animated cartoon.
MOSAIC [f] : The picture appears mosaic-patterned.
The picture expands vertically.
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
[d ]
[e ]
[f]
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. Press MENU, then select P EFFECT in
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial (p. 200).
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect, then press
the dial.
1
MANUAL SET
OFF
NEG. ART
SEPIA
B&W
SOLARIZE
SLIM
P
EFFECT
FLASH LVL
WHT BAL
N. S. LIGHT
AUTO SHTR
RETURN
STRETCH
PASTEL
MOSAIC
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
The follow ing functions do not w ork during the picture effect
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording
standby
– OLD MOVIE of digital effect
– Bounce
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)
Picture effect is automatically canceled.
60
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct
You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions.
Sound is recorded normally.
STILL
You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
You can record still images successively at constant intervals.
LUMI. (LUMINANCE KEY)
You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.
TRAIL
You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.
SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)
You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter is good for recording dark
pictures more brightly.
OLD MOVIE
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically
sets the wide mode to ON and picture effect to SEPIA, and sets the appropriate shutter
speed.
Still image
Moving picture
STILL
LUMI.
Still image
Moving picture
61
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, press FN to display PAGE1.
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.
(3) Press a desired digital effect. In the STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is
stored in memory.
(4) Press –/ + to adjust the effect.
– : To reduce the effect
+: To increase the effect
Items to be adjusted
STILL
The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving
picture
FLASH
LUMI.
The interval of frame by frame playback
The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be
swapped with a moving picture
TRAIL
The vanishing time of the incidental image
SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the
shutter speed.
OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary
(5) Press
OK to return to PAGE1.
1
2~4
DIG
DIG EFFT
OFF
DIG EFFT
OFF
FN
OK
OK
EFFT
SLOW
SHTR MOVIE
OLD
LUMI.
STILL
FLASH LUMI.
TRAIL
–
+
The bar appears when setting following
digital effect : STILL, FLASH, LUMI.,
TRAIL.
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct
Press
OFF to return to PAGE1.
62
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s – Dig it a l e ffe ct
Notes
• The following functions do not work during digital effect:
– Fader
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
– Tape photo recording
– Recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in the tape recording or tape recording
standby
• The PROGRAM AE does not work in the slow shutter.
• The following functions do not work in the old movie:
– Wide mode
– Picture effect
– PROGRAM AE
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)
Digital effect is automatically canceled.
When recording in the slow shutter
Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.
Shutter speed
Shutter speed number
SLOW SHTR 1
SLOW SHTR 2
SLOW SHTR 3
SLOW SHTR 4
Shutter speed
1/ 30
1/ 15
1/ 8
1/ 4
63
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE
You can select the PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) to suit your specific shooting
requirements.
Spotlight
This mode prevents people’s faces, for example, from appearing excessively white
when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater.
Soft portrait
This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as
people or flowers.
Sports lesson
This mode minimizes camera-shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.
Beach & ski
This mode prevents people’s faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.
Sunset & moon
This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general
night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.
Landscape
This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains, and
prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you
are recording a subject behind glass or a screen.
64
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50
only), press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE.
The indicator changes as follows:
y
y
y
y
y
1
2
AE
PROGRAM
To ca n ce l t h e PROGRAM AE
Press PROGRAM AE.
65
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE
Notes
• Because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance,
you cannot take close-ups in the following modes:
– Spotlight
– Sports lesson
– Beach & ski
• Your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects in the following modes:
– Sunset & moon
– Landscape
• The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE:
– Color Slow Shutter
– Slow Shutter
– Old movie
– Bounce
• When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only),
Sports lesson does not work. (The indicator flashes.)
• The PROGRAM AE does not work in the following cases. (The indicator flashes.)
– To set NIGHTSHOT to ON
– To record images on a “Memory Stick” using the MEMORY MIX.
While WHT BAL is set to AUTO in the menu settings
The white balance is adjusted even if the PROGRAM AE is selected.
You can adjust the follow ing functions w hile using the PROGRAM AE
– Exposure
– Flexible Spot Meter
If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium
lamp or mercury lamp
Flickering or changes in color may occur in the following modes. If this happens, turn
the PROGRAM AE off.
– Soft portrait
– Sports lesson
66
Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re m a n u a lly
You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Normally the exposure is automatically
adjusted. Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:
– When the subject is backlit
– When shooting subjects and dark backgrounds
– When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50
only), press EXPOSURE.
The exposure indicator appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness.
2
EXPOSURE
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re
Press EXPOSURE.
When you adjust the exposure manually, the follow ing functions do not w ork:
– Color Slow Shutter
– Backlight
Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure:
– If you change the PROGRAM AE.
– If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.
67
Usin g t h e sp o t lig h t -m e t e rin g
– Fle xib le Sp o t Me t e r
You can take a picture with the appropriate exposure automatically for just the point
you want to focus on and with its exposure fixed. Use the Flexible Spot Meter in the
following cases:
– The subject is backlit.
– When there is strong contrast between the subject and background such as with a
subject that is on stage and lighted by a spotlight.
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only), press FN to display PAGE1.
(2) Press SPOT METER. The SPOT METER screen appears.
(3) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen.
The SPOT METER indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The exposure of the
point you selected is adjusted.
(4) Press
OK to return to PAGE1.
1
2~4
FN
SPOT METER
PAGE1 PAGE2
EXIT
SPOT
METER
END
SCH
SPOT DIG
FOCUS EFFT
MEM
M I X METER
SPOT
AUTO
OK
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re
Press
AUTO to return to PAGE1.
The follow ing functions do not w ork during Flexible Spot Meter
– Color Slow Shutter
– Backlight
– Exposure
If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON
Your camcorder automatically returns from the Flexible Spot Meter to automatic
exposure.
68
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly
You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases.
Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.
• The autofocus is not effective when shooting
– Subjects through glass coated with water droplets
– Horizontal stripes
– Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky
• When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in
the background.
• Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod.
(1) Set FOCUS to MAN when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or
MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
The 9 indicator appears.
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.
2
Focus ring
FOCUS sw itch
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s
Set FOCUS to AUTO.
To re co rd d ist a n t su b je ct s
When you set FOCUS to INFINITY, the lens focuses on and
indicator appears. When
you release FOCUS, your camcorder returns to the manual focus. Use this mode when
your camcorder focuses on near objects even though you are trying to shoot a distant
object.
69
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly
To focus precisely
It is easier to focus on subjects if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the “W” (wide-angle)
after focusing at the “T” (telephoto) position.
When you shoot close to the subject
Focus at the end of the “W” (wide-angle) position.
9 changes as follow s:
when recording a distant subject
when the subject is too close to focus on
Focal distance information is displayed for about three seconds on the screen in
the follow ing cases:
– When switching the focus adjustment mode from autofocus to manual
– When turning the focus ring
Focal distance information
– This information aids focusing if it is not easy to focus on the subject, for example,
when recording in the dark. Use this information as a rough guide to get a sharp
focus.
– You cannot get correct information if you have attached a conversion lens (optional) to
your camcorder.
70
Usin g t h e sp o t fo cu s – Sp o t Fo cu s
You can take a picture with the appropriate focus automatically for just the point you
want to focus on and with its focus fixed.
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only), set FOCUS to MAN.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press SPOT FOCUS. The SPOT FOCUS screen appears.
(4) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen.
The 9 indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The focus of the point you selected
is adjusted.
(5) Press
OK to return to PAGE1.
2
3~5
FN
SPOT FOCUS
PAGE1 PAGE2
EXIT
SPOT
FOCUS
END
SCH
SPOT
FOCUS EFFT
DIG
MEM
M I X METER
SPOT
OK
FOCUS sw itch
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s
Set FOCUS to AUTO.
The follow ing functions do not w ork during Spot Focus:
– Exposure
– Fader
– Backlight
– PROGRAM AE
Focal distance information
It is not displayed on the screen.
71
In t e rva l re co rd in g
You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record
and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering, gradual
appearances, etc., with this function.
Example
1 s
1 s
[a ]
[b ]
9 min 59 s
10 min
9 min 59 s
10 min
[c]
[a ]REC TIME
[b ]Waiting time
[c] INTERVAL
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
INT. REC in , then press the dial (p. 201).
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set INTERVAL and REC TIME.
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then
press the dial.
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial.
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then
press the dial.
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
RETURN, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The INTERVAL indicator flashes.
(6) Press START/ STOP to start interval recording. The INTERVAL indicator lights
up.
72
In t e rva l re co rd in g
6
2
3
CAMERA SET
ZOOM
PHOTO REC
16:9WIDE
STBY
CAMERA SET
INT. REC
INTERVAL
REC TIME
RETURN
STBY
30SEC
D
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
INT. REC
ON
OFF
SET
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
5
CAMERA SET
INT. REC
INTERVAL
REC TIME
RETURN
STBY
30SEC
STBY
30SEC
1MIN
5MIN
10MIN
CAMERA SET
INT. REC
INTERVAL
REC TIME
RETURN
STBY
INTERVAL
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
CAMERA SET
INT. REC
INTERVAL
REC TIME
RETURN
STBY
0.5SEC
CAMERA SET
INT. REC
INTERVAL
REC TIME
RETURN
STBY
CAMERA SET
ZOOM
PHOTO REC
16:9WIDE
STBY
D
4
0.5SEC
1SEC
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC
INT. REC
1.5SEC
2SEC
ON
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l t h e in t e rva l re co rd in g
Perform either of the following:
– Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.
– Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.
To p e rfo rm n o rm a l re co rd in g d u rin g t h e w a t in ig t im e
You can perform normal recording only once during the waiting time. Press START/
STOP, and the indicator flashes and normal recording starts.
To stop normal recording, press START/ STOP again. To restart interval recording,
perform step 6.
On recording time
There may be a discrepancy in the recording time of up to +/ – six frames from the
selected time.
When pressing START/STOP during recording time
Interval recording stops. To restart it, perform step 6.
73
Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g
– Fra m e re co rd in g
You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.
To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a frame recording.
We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote
Commander after step 4.
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
FRAME REC in
, then press the dial (p. 201).
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.
(3) Press MENU to erase the menu display.
The FRAME REC indicator lights up.
(4) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a
recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.
(5) Move the subject, and repeat step 4.
4
MENU
2
CAMERA SET
ZOOM
PHOTO REC
16:9WIDE
STBY
CAMERA SET
ZOOM
PHOTO REC
16:9WIDE
STBY
D
D
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC OFF
INT. REC
RETURN
STEADYSHOT
FRAME REC ON
INT. REC
ON
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l t h e fra m e re co rd in g
Perform either of the following:
– Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.
– Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.
Note
The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if you use this function continuously.
When using the frame recording
The last recorded frame is longer than other frames.
74
— Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h p ict u re e ffe ct
During playback, you can process a scene using the following picture effect:
NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press MENU, then select P EFFECT in
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 200).
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect, then press
the dial.
For details of each picture effect, see page 60.
1
MANUAL SET
P
EFFECT
OFF
NEG. ART
SEPIA
B&W
SOLARIZE
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
Notes
• You cannot process externally input scenes using picture effect.
• You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the
image using picture effect. However, you can record images on a “Memory Stick”
(p. 135, 147), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.
Pictures processed by picture effect
Pictures processed by picture effect is not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack.
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back
The picture effect is automatically canceled.
75
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct
During playback, you can process a scene using the following digital effect:
STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.
(3) Press a desired digital effect. In the STILL or LUMI., the picture where you
select the mode is stored in memory as a still image.
(4) Press –/ + to adjust the effect. Refer to page 62 for details.
(5) Press
OK to return to PAGE2.
1
2,3
FN
DIG EFFT
OFF
DIG
OK
EFFT
STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct
Press
OFF to return to PAGE2.
Notes
• You cannot process externally input scenes using digital effect.
• You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the
image using digital effect. However, you can record images on a “Memory Stick”
(p. 135, 147), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.
Pictures processed by digital effect
Pictures processed by digital effect is not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack.
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back
Digital effect is automatically canceled.
76
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t a p e s
– Ta p e PB ZOOM
You can enlarge playback images recorded on tapes. Besides the operation described
here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded on “Memory Stick”s (p. 164).
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.
(2) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.
(3) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen.
The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback
image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area
again, the area moves to the center of the screen.
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.
You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its
size.
W: Decreases the zoom ratio.
T: Increases the zoom ratio.
PB ZOOM
× 5.0
4
T
W
END
1
FN
PB ZOOM
2
PB
ZOOM
END
To ca n ce l t h e PB ZOOM
Press
END.
77
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t a p e s – Ta p e PB ZOOM
Notes
• You cannot process externally input scenes using the PB ZOOM.
• You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the
image using the tape PB ZOOM. However, you can record images on a VCR using
your camcorder as a player.
• You cannot record moving pictures on a “Memory Stick” on your camcorder when
you have processed the picture using the tape PB ZOOM.
The PB ZOOM is automatically canceled w hen you activate the follow ing:
– Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
– Stop playback.
– Press MENU.
– Insert a “Memory Stick.”
Pictures in the PB ZOOM
Pictures in the PB ZOOM are not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack and the
(USB) jack.
In the PB ZOOM
If you press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen
disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.
Edge of the enlarged image
The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.
78
Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e
– ZERO SET MEMORY
Your camcorder goes forward or backward to automatically stop at a desired scene
having a tape counter value of “0:00:00”. Use the Remote Commander for this
operation.
(1) In the playback, press DISPLAY when the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator does
not appear.
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape
counter shows “0:00:00” and then starts counting. The ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator flashes.
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counter’s zero point. The tape stops
automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO
SET MEMORY indicator disappears, and the time code appears.
(5) Press N. Playback starts from the counter’s zero point.
ZERO SET MEMORY
DISPLAY
m
x
N
Notes
• When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory
will be canceled.
• There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.
• The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears when you press FN.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The zero set memory may not work correctly.
79
Se a rch in g t h e b o u n d a rie s o f re co rd e d
t a p e b y t it le – TITLE SEARCH
If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of
recorded tape by title. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Before operation
Set CM SEARCH in
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the TITLE
SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
(no indicator)
T
PHOTO SCAN
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback.
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that
you selected.
TITLE SEARCH
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO!
SEARCH
MODE
CONGRATULATIONS!
HAPPY NEW YEAR!
PRESENT
GOOD MORNING
WEDDING
TITLE SEARCH
3
4
5
6
7
8
HAPPY NEW YEAR!
PRESENT
GOOD MORNING
WEDDING
NIGHT
.
>
BASEBALL
[b ] [a ]
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for
[b ] Present point on the tape
To st o p se a rch in g
Press x.
If you use a cassette w ithout cassette memory
You cannot superimpose or search a title.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The title search may not work correctly.
To superimpose a title
See page 110.
80
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e
– DATE SEARCH
You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start
playback from that point (date search). Use a cassette with cassette memory for
convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each
recording date.
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry
Before operation
• You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.
• Set CM SEARCH in
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE
SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
(no indicator)
T
PHOTO SCAN
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.
Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected
date.
DATE SEARCH
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02
SEP/ 6/02
DEC/24/02
JAN/ 1/03
FEB/ 11/03
APR/29/03
SEARCH
MODE
DATE SEARCH
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02
SEP/ 6/02
DEC/24/02
JAN/ 1/03
FEB/ 11/03
APR/29/03
.
>
[b ] [a ]
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for
[b ] Present point on the tape
To st o p se a rch in g
Press x.
81
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e – DATE SEARCH
Note
If one day’s recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find
the point where the recording date changes.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The date search may not work correctly.
Cassette memory
The tape with cassette memory can hold six recording dates. If you search among seven
or more dates, see “Searching for the date without using cassette memory” below.
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then select CM SEARCH in
to OFF with the SEL/ PUSH
EXEC dial (p. 205).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE
SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)
(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press
> on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder
automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time
you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.
To st o p se a rch in g
Press x.
82
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o
– PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN
You can search for a still image you have recorded on a tape (PHOTO SEARCH).
You can also search for still images one after another and display each image for
five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (PHOTO SCAN). Use the
Remote Commander for these operations.
Use this function to check or edit still images.
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry
Before operation
• You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.
• Set CM SEARCH in
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
(no indicator)
T
PHOTO SCAN
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date
that you selected.
PHOTO SEARCH
2
3
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02
SEP/ 6/02
DEC/24/02
JAN/ 1/03
FEB/ 11/03
APR/29/03
5 30PM
:
SEARCH
MODE
8 50AM
:
10 30AM
:
11 25PM
:
4 11PM
:
1 45PM
PHOTO SEARCH
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02
SEP/ 6/02
DEC/24/02
JAN/ 1/03
FEB/ 11/03
APR/29/03
5 30PM
:
8 50AM
:
10 30AM
.
>
:
11 25PM
:
4 11PM
:
1 45PM
[b ] [a ]
MENU
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for
[b ] Present point on the tape
To st o p se a rch in g
Press x.
83
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o – PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CM SEARCH in
to OFF, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the photo for playback.
Each time you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or
next photo.
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.
To st o p se a rch in g
Press x.
84
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o – PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN
Sca n n in g p h o t o
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the
PHOTO SCAN indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH* t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH
(no indicator)
T
PHOTO SCAN
* Displayed only when CM SEARCH is set to ON in the menu settings.
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander.
Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.
2
SEARCH
MODE
PHOTO 00
SCAN
3
To st o p sca n n in g
Press x.
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
The photo search/ photo scan may not work correctly.
The available number of photos that can be searched using the cassette memory
The available number is up to 12 photos. However, you can search 13 photos or more
using the photo scan.
85
— Ed it in g —
Du b b in g a t a p e
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as
a player.
Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/ V connecting cable supplied with
your camcorder.
Before operation
• Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
• Press the following buttons to make the indicator disappear so that they will not be
superimposed on the edited tape:
On your camcorder:
DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL, DATA CODE
On the Remote Commander:
DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert
the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE.
Connect the A/ V connecting cable to AUDIO/ VIDEO jack.
Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
White
IN
Yellow
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO/VIDEO
VCR
AUDIO
: Signal flow
A/ V connecting
cable (supplied)
Red
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
86
Du b b in g a t a p e
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:
8 mm,
Betamax,
Hi8,
VHS,
ED Betamax,
S-VHS,
mini DV,
VHSC,
DV, Digital8,
S-VHSC,
MICRO MV
If your VCR is a monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,
the right channel audio is output.
If your VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
VCR.
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.
87
Du b b in g a t a p e
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/ OUT jack
on your camcorder and to DV IN on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital
connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality
editing. You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory
or letters on the “Memory Stick” index screen.
Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is equipped with
the input selector.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert
the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE. Refer to the
operating instructions of the VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.
DV IN/OUT
DV
DV IN
: Signal flow
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)
See page 225 for more information about i.LINK.
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM are not output
through the DV IN/ OUT jack.
If you record a playback pause picture w ith the DV IN/OUT jack
The recorded picture becomes rough. Also, when you play back the picture using other
video equipment, the picture may jitter.
88
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating
the VCR.
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.
Your camcorder can also dub on “Memory Stick”s. See page 151 for more information.
Unwanted scene
Unwanted scene
Switch the order
Be fo re o p e ra t in g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t a p e s
re co rd e d o n o t h e r e q u ip m e n t
Step 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 89).
Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation (p. 90, 94).
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 95).
When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip steps 2 and 3.
Usin g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t a p e s re co rd e d o n o t h e r
e q u ip m e n t
Operation 1 Making a program (p. 97).
Operation 2 Performing the program (dubbing a tape) (p. 99).
Note
When editing digital video on tapes, the operation signals cannot be sent with
LANC.
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR
You can connect both an A/ V connecting cable and an i.LINK cable (DV connecting
cable).
When you use the A/ V connecting cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 86.
When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), connect the devices as illustrated
on page 88.
If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)
With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital
form for high-quality editing.
89
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared rays to the remote sensor on
the VCR.
When you connect using an A/ V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps
(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.
(1) Se t t h e IR SETUP co d e
1 Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE.
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.
3 Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
, then press the dial (p. 209).
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
6 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.
7 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.
8 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP and turn the dial to select
IR SETUP code number of your VCR, then press the dial.
Check the code in “About IR SETUP codes.” (p. 91)
MENU
6
3
4
5
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
0 08 55 06
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
IR
i. LINK
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
RETURN
] :
TAPE
MEMORY
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
MENU END
8
:
:
:
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
0 08 55 06
IN
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
0 08 55 06
1
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
RETURN
] :
TAPE
3
:
:
:
MEMORY
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
0
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
MENU END
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
UNDO
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
IR
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
IR
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
90
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
About IR SETUP codes
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the
correct code to match your VCR. The default setting is code number 3.
Brand
IR SETUP code
Brand
IR SETUP code
22, 23, 24, 28, 29
23, 32, 80
21, 33, 35
77, 78
Sony
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Mitsubishi/ MGA
Multitech
NEC
Admiral (M. Wards) 89
Aiwa
47, 54, 80
Akai
49, 51
21, 35
36
Olympic
Optimus
Orion
Audio Dynamic
22
Bell&Howell
(M. Wards)
60
Panasonic
Pentax
16, 17, 77, 78
8, 42
Broksonic
Canon
21, 70, 82
77, 78
Philco
26, 70, 77, 78
47, 77, 78, 83
78
Citizen
47
Philips
Craig
47, 73
Pioneer
Curtis Mathis
Daewoo
DBX
8, 77, 80
Quasar
6, 16, 17, 77, 78
26, 40, 77
RCA/ PROSCAN
7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78, 78*, 83,
101
21, 33, 35
Dimensia
Emerson
Fisher
8
Realistic
Sansui
22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88
26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82
21
36, 37, 44, 45
Singer
73
Funai
80
Samsung
Sanyo
24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*
General Electric
Goldstar/ LG
GO VIDEO
Hitachi
8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101
26, 36, 37, 47
47
Scott
22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41
71
Sharp
88, 89
8, 42, 78
Shintom
Signature 2000
Sylvania
Symphonic
Tashiro
Tatung
Teac
73
HQ
40
80, 89
Instant Replay
JC Penny
JVC
77, 78
77, 78, 80, 83
80
8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77
12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35
21, 33, 35, 47
36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80
17, 77, 78, 83
21, 33, 35
47
Kenwood
LXI (Sears)
Magnavox
Marantz
Marta
21, 33, 35
21, 33, 35, 80
77, 78
Technics
Toshiba
Wards
7, 40, 49
37, 47, 88, 89, 95
21, 33, 35, 36
95
47
Memorex
Minolta
37, 77
Yamaha
Zenith
8, 42
* TV/ VCR component
Note on IR SETUP codes
Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.
91
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
(2) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l t h e re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording pause
on the VCR, then press the dial.
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
IR TEST
0 08 55 06
1
2
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
IR TEST
RETURN
REC
PB
RETURN
] :
MENU END
[
] :
[
MENU END
Buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:
– Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.
– Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.
– Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.
(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r
Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote
sensor of the VCR.
Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the
devices.
Infrared rays emitter
VCR
Remote sensor
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
92
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
(4) Co n firm in g VCR o p e ra t io n
1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set to recording pause.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.
When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0:08:55:06
2
3
”CUT–OUT” ENGAGE
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
REC PAUSE
RETURN
EXECUTE
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
0:08:55:06
COMPLETE
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
When the VCR does not operate correctly
• After checking the code in “About IR SETUP codes”, set the IR SETUP or the
PAUSEMODE again.
• Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.
• Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.
93
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le
(DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional), follow the
procedure below.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV
input. When you connect a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch
to VCR/ VTR.
(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
, then press the dial (p. 209).
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.
MENU
6
3
4
5
:
:
:
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
IR
i. LINK
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
RETURN
] :
TAPE
MEMORY
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
[
MENU END
MENU END
7
:
:
:
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
0 08 55 06
IN
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
0 08 55 06
1
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
i. LINK
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
RETURN
] :
TAPE
:
:
:
MEMORY
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
0
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
MENU END
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
UNDO
0 08 55 06
IR
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
IR
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
94
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators.
Note
When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able to
operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR.
Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.
St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR
You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Have a pen and
paper ready for notes. Before operation, eject a cassette from your camcorder.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, then set
to recording pause.
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you do not need to set to recording
pause.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
IN and OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the
number values for adjusting the synchronization.
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen.
When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.
Take a note of the first number value of each IN and the closing number value
of each OUT.
(5) Calculate the average of all the first number values of each IN, and the
average of all the last number values of each OUT.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-IN”, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of IN, then
press the dial.
The calculated start position for recording is set.
(8) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select “CUT-OUT”, then press the dial.
(9) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of OUT,
then press the dial.
The calculated stop position for recording is set.
(10)Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
RETURN, then press the dial.
95
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
0 08 55 06
2,3
6
8
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
0 08 55 06
RETURN
EXECUTE
ENGAGE
0
PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE
IR TEST
RETURN
[
ME
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
0 08 55 06
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
EXECUTING
”CUT–OUT” No. 5
IR SETUP IN
PAUSEMODE –60
IR TEST
RETURN
ME
[
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
0 08 55 06
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
EDIT SET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
”CUT–IN”
”CUT–OUT”
IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE
IR TEST
0 08 55 06
COMPLETE
0
RETURN
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
Notes
• When you complete step 3, the image used to adjust the synchronization is recorded
for about 50 seconds.
• If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the
tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 seconds’ lead before starting
recording.
• When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) you may not be able to
operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR. Keep the i.LINK
connection, and set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings. Video and audio are sent
by digital signals.
96
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g a p ro g ra m
(1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for
recording into the VCR.
(2) Press MENU and turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
then press the dial (p. 209).
,
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.
(4) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video
operation buttons, then pause playback.
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.
(5) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to
select MARK, then press the dial.
The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark
changes to light blue.
(6) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video
operation buttons, then pause playback.
(7) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program
mark changes to light blue.
(8) Repeat steps 4 to 7, then set the program.
When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.
You can set up to 20 programs in maximum.
MENU
2
5
3
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
0 08 55 06
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT READY
RETURN
OTHERS
DATA CODE
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
VIDEO EDIT RETURN
RETURN
MARK
1
IN
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
TAPE
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
MEMORY
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
7
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
N X 0 08 55 06
OUT
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
N X 0 09 07 06
IN
VIDEO EDIT
N X 0 10 01 23
IN
1
2
MARK
UNDO
4
UNDO
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
ERASE ALL
START
EDIT SET
:
0
:
:
:
1
:
:
:
3
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00
SCENE
TOTAL 0 00 12 00
SCENE
TOTAL 0 00 47 12
SCENE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
97
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t
Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.
To cancel erasing
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial in step 2.
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,
then select TAPE, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then select EXECUTE,
then press the dial.
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.
To cancel erasing all programs
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.
To cancel a program you have set
Press MENU.
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.
Note
You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing.
On a blank portion of the tape
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portion of the tape.
If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape
The total time code may not be displayed correctly.
98
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s – Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)
Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g a t a p e )
Make sure that your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to
recording pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), this procedure
is not necessary.
When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,
then select TAPE, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then select EXECUTE, then
press the dial.
Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.
The program mark flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator
appears during edit on the screen.
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing ends.
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g
Press x using the video operation buttons.
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO
EDIT in the menu settings.
Press MENU to end the Digital program editing.
You cannot record on the VCR w hen:
– The tape has run out.
– The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.
– The IR SETUP code is not correct. (when IR is selected)
– The button to cancel recording pause is not correct. (when IR is selected)
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen w hen:
– The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.
– i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected.
– The power of the connected VCR is not turned on. (when you set i.LINK)
99
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/
audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.
Before operation
Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If
you are recording a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,
then immediately press X on your camcorder.
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select
a TV program if you are recording from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR
appears on the screen.
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording
from.
S VIDEO
3
REC
PAUSE
AUDIO/
VIDEO
Yellow
OUT
White
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
Red
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
VCR
: Signal flow
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r
In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5,
press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.
100
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
If your TV or VCR is a monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white
plug is connected, the left channel audio is recorded, and when the red plug is
connected, the right channel audio is recorded.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
TV or VCR.
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.
Note on the Remote Commander
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with
black paper.
101
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/ OUT jack
on your camcorder and to DV OUT on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital
connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality
editing.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder,
and insert the recorded tape into the VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,
then immediately press X on your camcorder.
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on
the screen.
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording
from.
3
REC
PAUSE
DV IN/OUT
DV
DV OUT
: Signal flow
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r
In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5,
press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.
102
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).
During digital editing
The color of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed
picture.
If you record playback pause picture w ith the DV IN/OUT jack
The recorded picture becomes rough. When you play back the picture using your
camcorder, the picture may jitter.
Before recording
Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the screen or in the viewfinder. The DV
IN indicator may appear on both equipment.
Note on the Remote Commander
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with
black paper.
103
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR
– In se rt Ed it in g
You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by
specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this
operation. Connections are the same as on page 100 or 102.
Insert a cassette containing the desired scene to insert into the VCR.
[a ]
[A]
[b ]
[c]
[B]
[C]
[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be superimposed
[B]: A tape before editing
[C]: A tape after editing
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then press
X to set the VCR to the playback pause.
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c]. Then press X to set your
camcorder to the playback pause.
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET
MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in
memory. The tape counter shows “0:00:00.”
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ] by pressing m, then press
z REC and the button on its right simultaneously.
(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder
to start inserting the new scene.
Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your
camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause.
104
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR – In se rt Ed it in g
5
REC
0:00:00
ZERO SET
MEMORY
4
ZERO SET
MEMORY
To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t
Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator and begin from step 3.
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r
In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 6,
press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.
Note
Pictures and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will
be erased when you insert the new scene.
If you insert scenes on the tape recorded on another camcorder (including other
DCR-TRV40/TRV50)
The pictures and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a
tape recorded on your camcorder.
When the inserted picture is played back
Pictures and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not a
malfunction.
Pictures and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP
mode.
To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point
Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to stop inserting.
If you press FN
The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator is not displayed.
Note on the Remote Commander
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with
black paper.
105
Au d io d u b b in g
You can record audio to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio
equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to
your recorded tape already recorded in the 12-bit sound mode by specifying the start
and end points. The original sound will not be erased.
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Select one of the following connections to add audio.
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e w it h t h e MIC ja ck
MIC
(PLUG IN POWER)
Microphone (optional)
: Signal flow
You can check recorded picture and sound by connecting your camcorder to a TV with
the A/ V connecting cable.
Recorded sound is not output from the speaker. Check the sound by using a TV or
headphones.
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e t o t h e in t e llig e n t a cce sso ry sh o e
Intelligent accessory shoe
Microphone (optional)
106
Au d io d u b b in g
Co n n e ct in g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le t o t h e AUDIO/VIDEO ja ck
Audio equipment
LINE OUT
AUDIO L
White
AUDIO R
Red
L
R
AUDIO/
VIDEO
Do not connect the
video (yellow) plug.
: Signal flow
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
Du b b in g w it h t h e b u ilt -in m icro p h o n e
No connection is necessary.
Note
When dubbing with the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack or the built-in microphone, pictures are
not output through the S VIDEO jack or the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack. Check the recorded
picture on the screen. You can check the recorded sound by using headphones.
If you make all the connections
The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order:
• MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack
• Intelligent accessory shoe
• AUDIO/ VIDEO jack
• Built-in microphone
107
Au d io d u b b in g
Ad d in g a u d io o n a re co rd e d t a p e
Choose a connection described on the previous pages, and connect audio equipment or
microphone to your camcorder. Then follow the procedure below.
(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.
(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point
where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback
pause.
(4) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote Commander. The green X indicator
appears on screen.
(5) Press X and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time.
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While audio is
being recorded, the red
appears on the screen.
(6) Press x at the point where you want to stop recording.
AUDIO DUB
To add audio more precisely
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to
stop recording later in the playback.
Carry out from steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO
SET MEMORY was pressed.
108
Au d io d u b b in g
Mo n it o rin g t h e n e w re co rd e d so u n d
(1) Play back the tape on which you added audio.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select AUDIO MIX in
settings, then press the dial.
in the menu
VCR SET
HiFi SOUND
AUDIO MIX
A/VcDV OUT ST1
ST2
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the balance between the original
sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2), then press the dial.
Five minutes after you disconnect the power supply or remove the battery
pack, the AUDIO MIX setting returns to original sound (ST1) only. The default
setting is original sound only.
Notes
• New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz).
• New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode.
• You cannot add audio with the DV IN/ OUT jack.
• You cannot add audio on the blank portion of the tape.
If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) is connected to your camcorder
You cannot add audio to a recorded tape.
We recommend that you add audio on a tape recorded w ith your camcorder
If you add audio on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including other
DCR-TRV40/ TRV50), the sound quality may become worse.
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock
You cannot record on a tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.
109
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le
If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title. When
you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point
where you superimposed it.
VACATION
(1) In the recording , recording standby, playback or playback pause, press
MENU, then select TITLE in
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 205).
, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.
The title flashes.
(4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary.
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select COLOR, SIZE or POSITION, then
press the dial. The selected item appears.
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the
dial.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.
In the recording, playback or playback pause:
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title
is set.
In the standby:
The TITLE indicator appears. When you press START/ STOP to start
recording, TITLE SAVE appears on the screen for five seconds, and the title is
set.
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
2
3
4
VACATION
THE END
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
TITLE
VACATION
MENU
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
[
] :
[
] :
[
] :
MENU END
EXEC SAVE MENU END
SIZE
SMALL
TITLE
SIZE
LARGE
VACATION
VACATION
[
] :
[
] :
EXEC SAVE MENU END
110
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock
You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write
protection.
To use a custom title
If you want to use a custom title, select
in step 2.
If the tape has a blank portion
You cannot superimpose a title on the portion.
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions
Titles may not be displayed correctly.
Titles superimposed w ith your camcorder
• Titles are displayed by only the
DV format video equipment with an index titler.
• The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when
searching a recording with other video equipment.
If the tape has too many index signals
You may not be able to superimpose a title because the cassette memory becomes full.
In this case, delete data you do not need.
To not display titles
Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 205).
Title setting
• The title color changes as follows:
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE
• The title size changes as follows:
SMALL y LARGE
You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size. If you input more than 12
characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE.
• If you select SMALL, you have nine choices for the title position.
If you select LARGE, you have eight choices for the title position.
One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, w ith each title comprising five
characters
However, if the cassette memory is full with date, photo and cassette label data, one
cassette can have only up to about 11 titles each comprising five characters.
Cassette memory capacity is as follows:
– six date data
– 12 photo data
– one cassette label
If the “
FULL” mark appears
The cassette memory is full. Erase unwanted titles.
111
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le
Era sin g a t it le
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE in
, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press
the dial. ERASE OK ? indicator appears.
(4) Make sure that the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/ PUSH
EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
The ERASING flashes on the screen. When the title is erased, the COMPLETE
is displayed.
2
CM SET
TITLE ERASE
TITLE
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
CM SEARCH
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO!
CONGRATULATIONS!
HAPPY NEW YEAR!
PRESENT
GOOD MORNING
WEDDING
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
3
4
4
MENU
TITLE ERASE
TITLE ERASE
4
PRESENT
PRESENT
ERASE OK?
RETURN
OK
ERASE OK?
RETURN
EXECUTE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l e ra sin g a t it le
Select RETURN in step 4 or 5.
112
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s
You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each
title can have up to 20 characters.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE in
, then
press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,
then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,
then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the
dial.
(7) Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have selected all characters and completed the
title.
(8) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
[SET], then press the dial.
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
3
4
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
TITLE SET
TITLE SET
CUSTOM1 SET
CUSTOM2 SET
RETURN
––––––––––––––––––––
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
TITLE SET
TITLE SET
1
3
2
4
–––––––––––––––––––
–
–––––––––––––––––––
–
5
7
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
TITLE SET
––––––––––––––––––––
TITLE SET
S
–––––––––––––––––––
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
113
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s
To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d
In step 4, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want
to change, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to
select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter the
new title as desired.
If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in the standby w hile a
cassette is in your camcorder
The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in
memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA again, then
proceed from step 1.
We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that
your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.
To delete the title
Select [C]. The last character is erased.
To enter a space
Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part.
114
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e
If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. Labels can
consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert
the labeled cassette and when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or VCR, the
label is displayed for about five seconds.
(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE in
then press the dial (p. 205). Tape title display appears.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,
then press the dial.
,
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the
dial.
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you finish the label.
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial.
The label is stored in memory.
MENU
3
4~6
CM SET
TAPE TITLE
TAPE TITLE
TITLE
READY
––––––––––
––––––––––
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
CM SEARCH
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
CM SET
TITLE
[
ME
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
CM SEARCH
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
––––––––––
TAPE TITLE
TAPE TITLE
TAPE TITLE
M
––––––––––
–––––––––
[
ME
––––––––––
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
115
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e
To e ra se t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e
In step 4 turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial. The last
character is erased.
To ch a n g e t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e
Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way to make a new label.
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock
You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.
If the tape has too many index signal
You may not be able to label a cassette because the cassette memory becomes full. In
this case, delete data you do not need.
If you have superimposed titles in the cassette
When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear.
When the “-----” indicator has few er than 10 spaces
The cassette memory is full.
The “-----” indicates the number of characters you can select for the label.
To enter a space
Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part.
Era sin g a ll t h e d a t a in ca sse t t e m e m o ry
You can erase all the data in cassette memory at once.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL in
then press the dial (p. 205).
,
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes
to EXECUTE.
CM SET
TITLE
CM SET
TITLE
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
CM SEARCH
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
CM SEARCH
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN
RETURN
OK
RETURN
EXECUTE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
ERASING flashes on the screen. When all the data is erased, COMPLETE is
displayed.
To ca n ce l d e le t in g
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 3 or 4.
116
— “ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s —
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
You can record and play back images on a “Memory Stick” supplied with your
camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete images. You can exchange image
data with other equipment such as your computer etc., using the USB cable for
“Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder.
On file fo rm a t
Still image (JPEG)
Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg).
Moving picture (MPEG)
Your camcorder compresses picture data in MPEG format (extension .mpg).
Typ ica l im a g e d a t a file n a m e
Still image
100-0001:
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.
Dsc00001.jpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer.
Moving picture
MOV00001:
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.
Mov00001.mpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer.
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Terminal
Write-protect tab
Labeling position
• You cannot record or erase images when the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick”
is set to LOCK.
• The position and shape of the write-protect tab may be different depending on the
model.
• We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of your computer.
• Image data may be damaged in the following cases:
– If you eject the “Memory Stick” or turn the power off during reading or writing.
– If you use “Memory Stick”s near static electricity or magnetic fields.
• Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts
of the terminal.
• Stick the label at the labeling position.
• Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to “Memory Stick”s.
• Do not disassemble or modify “Memory Stick”s.
• Do not let “Memory Stick”s get wet.
• Do not use or keep “Memory Stick”s in locations that are:
– Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun.
– Under direct sunlight
– Very humid or subject to corrosive gases
• When you carry or store a “Memory Stick,” put it in its case.
117
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
“ Me m o ry St ick” s fo rm a t t e d o n co m p u t e r
“Memory Stick”s formatted on Windows OS or Macintosh computers are not
guaranteed compatible with your camcorder.
No t e s o n im a g e d a t a co m p a t ib ilit y
• Image data files recorded on “Memory Stick”s by your camcorder conform with the
Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEITA
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). You cannot
play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-
TRV890E/ TRV900/ TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform with this
universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)
• If you cannot use the “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it
with this camcorder (p. 204). However, formatting erases all information on the
“Memory Stick.”
• “Memory Stick” and
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• All other product names mentioned here may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
“TM” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.
118
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the B mark
facing as illustrated.
Access lamp
“Memory Stick” slot
B mark
Eje ct in g a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Press the “Memory Stick” once lightly.
While the access lamp is lit or flashing
Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data
from the “Memory Stick” or recording the data on the “Memory Stick.” Do not turn the
power off, eject a “Memory Stick.” Otherwise, image data may become damaged.
If “
MEMORY STICK ERROR” is displayed
Reinsert “Memory Stick” a few times. The “Memory Stick” may be damaged if the
indicator is still displayed. If this occurs, use another “Memory Stick.”
119
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Usin g a t o u ch p a n e l
Most operation buttons for use of “Memory Stick”s are displayed on the LCD screen.
Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV50
only) to operate each function.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. Operation buttons appear on the LCD
screen. You can switch the memory playback/ memory camera by pressing
PLAY/ CAM.
(3) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(4) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(5) Press PAGE3 to go to PAGE3. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.
(6) Press a desired operation item.
Refer to relevant pages for each function.
3~6
1
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
FN
LOCK
MEMORY/
NETWORK
In the memory camera
1360
SFN
1/12
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT
SELF
TIMER
SPOT PLAY INDEX SPOT
FOCUS
METER
1360
SFN
1/12
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT
LCD
BRT
PLAY INDEX
MEM
M I X
2
In the memory
camera
In the memory
playback (still
image)
1360
SFN
1/12
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT
SLIDE PLAY INDEX
SHOW
9PIC
PRINT
PLAY INDEX
FN
–
+
CAM INDEX
FN
120
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To e xe cu t e se t t in g s
Press
OK.
To ca n ce l se t t in g s
Press
OFF to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.
Notes
• When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the
LCD screen from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index
finger.
• Do not press the LCD screen with sharp objects other than the supplied stylus. (DCR-
TRV50 only)
• Do not press the LCD screen too hard.
• Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.
• If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You
can control the display with DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder.
• When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is
required (CALIBRATION) (p. 230).
• When the LCD screen gets dirty, clean it with the supplied cleaning cloth.
When executing each item
The green bar appears above the item.
If the items are not available
The color of the items changes to gray.
Press FN to display the follow ing buttons:
In the memory camera
PAGE1
PAGE2
PAGE3
SELFTIMER, SPOT FOCUS, PLAY, INDEX, SPOT METER
LCD BRT, PLAY, INDEX, MEM MIX
SLIDE SHOW, PLAY, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT
In the memory playback
+
–
PAGE1
PAGE2
PAGE3
PB ZOOM, CAM, INDEX, DELETE,
,
–
+
LCD BRT, CAM, INDEX, DATA CODE,
,
–
+
SLIDE SHOW, CAM, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT,
,
121
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e q u a lit y
You can select the image quality in still image recording. The default setting is SUPER
FINE.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then select STILL SET in
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial
(p. 203).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY , then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality , then press
the dial.
1
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
LOCK
MEMORY/
NETWORK
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
3
BURST
QUALITY
IMAGESIZE FINE
RETURN STANDARD
SUPER FINE
REMAIN
12
[
] :
MENU END
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
BURST
4
QUALITY
STANDARD
IMAGESIZE
RETURN
REMAIN
36
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
122
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Im a g e q u a lit y se t t in g s
Setting
Meaning
SUPER FINE (SFN)
This is the highest image quality in your camcorder.
The number of still images you can record is less than
in FINE mode. Super fine images are compressed to
about 1/ 3.
FINE (FINE)
Use this mode when you want to record high quality
images. Fine images are compressed to about 1/ 6.
STANDARD (STD)
This is the standard image quality in your camcorder.
Standard images are compressed to about 1/ 10.
Note
In some cases, changing the image quality may not affect the image quality, depending
on the type of images you are shooting.
Differences in image quality
Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The
memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the selected image quality
and image size. Details are shown in the table below. (You can select 1360 × 1020 or 640
× 480 image size in the menu settings.)
1360 × 1020 image size
Image quality
SUPER FINE
FINE
Memory capacity
About 900 KB
About 450 KB
About 300 KB
STANDARD
640 × 480 image size
Image quality
SUPER FINE
FINE
Memory capacity
About 190 KB
About 100 KB
About 60 KB
STANDARD
Image quality indicator
The image quality indicator is not displayed during playback.
When you select image quality
The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on
the screen.
123
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Se le ct in g t h e im a g e size
You can select either of two image sizes
Still images:
1360 × 1020 or 640 × 480. (When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA
or VCR, the image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.)
The default setting is 1360 × 1020.
Moving pictures: 320 × 240 or 160 × 112
The default setting is 320 × 240.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET (still
image) or MOVIE SET (moving picture) in
, then press the dial (p. 203).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size, then press the
dial.
The indicator changes as follows:
Still images:
1360
320
640
160
Moving pictures:
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
1
3
4
VCR
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
BURST
1360
MEMORY SET
MOVIE SET
320
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
IMAGESIZE 320 × 240
REMAIN 160 × 112
RETURN
QUALITY
IMAGESIZE 1360 × 1020
MEMORY/
NETWORK
LOCK
RETURN
640 × 480
REMAIN
REMAIN
12
40sec
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
BURST
MEMORY SET
MOVIE SET
IMAGESIZE 160 × 112
QUALITY
REMAIN
IMAGESIZE 640 × 480
RETURN
RETURN
REMAIN
REMAIN
60
2min
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MENU
124
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n
Im a g e size se t t in g s
Setting
Meaning
Indicator
1360
640
1360 × 1020
Records 1360 × 1020 still images.
640 × 480
320 × 240
160 × 112
Records 640 × 480 still images.
Records 320 × 240 moving pictures.
Records 160 × 112 moving pictures.
320
160
Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s yo u ca n re co rd o n a
“ Me m o ry St ick”
The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality and
image size you select and the complexity of the subject.
Type of “Memory Stick”s
Image quality Image size
8MB
16MB
32MB
64MB
128MB
(supplied)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
1360 × 1020
640 × 480 40 images
1360 × 1020 17 images
640 × 480 80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images 1310 images
1360 × 1020 25 images 50 images 100 images 205 images 415 images
640 × 480 120 images 240 images 485 images 980 images 1970 images
8 images
17 images
35 images
71 images 140 images
SUPER FINE
80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images
34 images 69 images 140 images 280 images
FINE
STANDARD
Ap p ro xim a t e t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s yo u ca n re co rd o n a
“ Me m o ry St ick”
The time of moving pictures you can record varies depending on which image size you
select and the complexity of the subject.
Type of “Memory Stick”s
Image size
8MB
16MB
32MB
64MB
128MB
(supplied)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
1 min.
20 sec.
2 min.
40 sec.
5 min.
20 sec.
10 min.
40 sec.
21 min.
20 sec.
320 × 240
5 min.
20 sec.
10 min.
40 sec.
21 min.
20 sec.
42 min.
40 sec.
85 min.
20 sec.
160 × 112
The table above shows approximate number and times of still images and moving
pictures you can record on a “Memory Stick” formatted by your camcorder.
Note
When still images recorded on your camcorder in 1360 × 1020 size are played back on
other equipment that does not support 1360 × 1020 size, the full image may not appear.
125
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry
St ick” s – Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
You can record still images on “Memory Stick”s.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PHOTO lightly. The green z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The
brightness of the image and focus are adjusted, being targeted for the middle
of the image and are fixed. Recording does not start yet.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.
The still image will be displayed after the shutter sounds.
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the
“Memory Stick.”
[a ][b ]
2
SFN
1 / 12
1360
PHOTO
PLAY INDEX
FN
SFN
1360
3
1
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
PLAY INDEX
FN
PHOTO
LOCK
MEMORY/
NETWORK
[a ]: Number of recorded images
[b ]: Approximate number of images that can
be recorded on the “Memory Stick”
Yo u ca n re co rd st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s in t h e t a p e
re co rd in g o r t a p e re co rd in g st a n d b y
For the details, see page 47.
126
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
The following functions do not work:
– Wide mode
– Digital zoom
– SteadyShot
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
– Fader
– Picture effect
– Digital effect
– Title
– Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)
While you are recording a still image
You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press
the button.
When you press PHOTO lightly in step 2
The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.
Recording data
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the “Memory Stick.”
To display the recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use
the Remote Commander for this opration (p. 42).
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER
switch is set to CAMERA.
127
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Re co rd in g im a g e s co n t in u o u sly
You can record still images continuously. Before recording, select one of the four modes
described below in the menu settings.
NORMAL [a ]
Your camcorder shoots up to three still images in 1360 × 1020 size or nine still images in
640 × 480 size at about 0.5 sec intervals. (
)
HIGH SPEED [a ]
Your camcorder shoots up to 16 still images in 640 × 480 size at about 0.07 sec intervals.
(
)
EXP BRKTG (Exposure Bracketing)
Your camcorder automatically shoots three images at about 0.5 sec intervals at different
exposures. (
)
MULTI SCRN (Multi Screen) [b ]
Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.4 sec intervals and displays the
images on a single page divided into nine boxes. Still images are recorded in 640 × 480
size. (
)
[a]
[b]
128
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET in
then press the dial (p. 203).
,
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select BURST, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the
dial.
(5) Press MENU to make the menu setting disappear.
(6) Press PHOTO deeper.
PHOTO
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
BURST
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
BURST
3
4
OFF
OFF
QUALITY
QUALITY
NORMAL
IMAGESIZE
RETURN
IMAGESIZE HIGH SPEED
RETURN
EXP BRKTG
MULTI SCRN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
BURST
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
BURST
QUALITY
IMAGESIZE
RETURN
OFF
NORMAL
HIGH SPEED
QUALITY
IMAGESIZE HIGH SPEED
RETURN
EXP BRKTG
MULTI SCRN
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
If t h e ca p a cit y o f t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” b e co m e s fu ll
”
FULL” appears on the screen, and you cannot record a still image on this “Memory
Stick.”
The number of still images in continuous shooting
The number of still images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image
size and the capacity of the “Memory Stick.”
During recording still images continuously
The flash does not work.
When shooting w ith the self-timer or the Remote Commander
Your camcorder automatically records up to the maximum recordable number of still
images.
129
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
When selecting NORMAL or HIGH SPEED
Recording continues up to the maximum number of still images during pressing
PHOTO deeper. Release PHOTO to stop recording.
When selecting HIGH SPEED
Flickering or changes in color may occur. Also, your camcorder prevents focusing on
near objects.
If there is space remaining on the “Memory Stick” for less than three photos
You cannot carry out the exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG). “
FULL” is displayed
when you press PHOTO.
The effect of exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG)
The effect may not appear clearly on the LCD screen.
Checking images on a TV monitor or computer display for the expected effect is
recommended.
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh
The flash automatically pops up to strobe. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To
change the flash mode, press (flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator
appears on the screen.
(flash)
Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:
t
t
t No indicator
Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce the red-eye
phenomenon.
Forced flash:
No flash:
The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness.
The flash does not fire.
The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change
FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 200). Try recording
various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.
130
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Notes
• The recommended shooting distance using the built-in flash is 0.3 m to 2.5 m (31/ 32
feet to 8 1/ 3 feet).
• Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light
from the flash or cause lens shadow to appear.
• You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.
•
(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on
individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-
recording flash or other conditions.
• The flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright
location.
• If it is not easy to focus on a subject automatically, for example, when recording in the
dark, use HOLOGRAM AF (p. 132) or the focal distance information (p. 70) for
focusing manually.
If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after disconnecting the
pow er supply
Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto).
The flash does not fire even if you select auto and
during the follow ing operations:
– NightShot
(auto red-eye reduction)
– Exposure
– Flexible Spot meter
– Spotlight of PROGRAM AE
– Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE
– Landscape of PROGRAM AE
When you use an external flash (optional) w hich does not have the auto red-eye
reduction
You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction.
During recording images continuously
The flash does not work.
131
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Sh o o t in g w it h a n a u xilia ry lig h t – HOLOGRAM AF
The HOLOGRAM AF is an auxiliary light source used for focusing on subjects in dark
places.
Set HOLOGRAM F in
to AUTO in the menu settings. (The default setting is AUTO.)
When appears on the screen in a dark place, press PHOTO lightly. Then the
auxiliary light will automatically emit until the subject is focused.
HOLOGRAM AF emitter
Ab o u t HOLOGRAM AF
“HOLOGRAM AF (Auto-Focus),” an application of laser holograms, is a new AF
optical system that enables still image shooting in dark places. Having gentler radiation
than conventional high-brightness LEDs or lamps, the system satisfies Laser Class 1 (*)
specification and thus maintains higher safety for human eyes.
No safety problems will be caused by directly looking into the HOLOGRAM AF emitter
at a close range. However, it is not recommended to do so, because you may experience
such effects like several minutes of image residual and dazzling, that you encounter
after looking into a flashlight.
* HOLOGRAM AF satisfies Class 1(time base 30 000 seconds), specified in all of JIS
(Japan), IEC(EU), and FDA(US) industry standards.
Complying with these standards identifies the laser product to be safe, under a
condition that a human looks at the laser light either directly or even through a lens
for 30 000 seconds.
132
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Notes
• A conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the HOLOGRAM AF light and make
focusing difficult.
• If enough light does not reach the subject even if the HOLOGRAM AF emitter is
emitted (recommended shooting distance is 2.5 m (8 1/ 3 feet)), the subject will not be
focused.
• Focusing may be hampered if the light emitted from the HOLOGRAM AF is blocked
by an obstruction.
• Focus is achieved as long as HOLOGRAM AF light reaches to the subject even if its
light is slightly out of the middle position of the subject.
• If HOLOGRAM AF light is dim, it sometimes becomes difficult to focus. If this
happens, wipe the HOLOGRAM AF emitter with a soft, dry cloth.
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit w hen:
– Flash is set to
No flash
– NightShot is set to ON
– Focusing manually
– Using Spot Focus
– Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE
– Landscape of PROGRAM AE
– Continuous photo recording
When you use the external flash (optional)
HOLOGRAM AF emits.
133
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g
Se lf-t im e r m e m o ry p h o t o re co rd in g
You can record images on “Memory Stick”s with the self-timer. You can also use the
Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press SELFTIMER.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.
4
PHOTO
PHOTO
2
FN
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r
Press SELFTIMER so that the
(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen. You
cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:
– Self-timer recording is finished.
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
134
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill
im a g e s
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a still
image on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data
through the input connector and record it as a still image on a “Memory Stick.”
Before operation
• Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press N. Moving pictures recorded on the tape are played back.
(3) Press PHOTO lightly until picture you want to capture from the tape freezes
and CAPTURE appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet.
To change from the image selected to another image, release PHOTO once and
press it lightly again.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on
the “Memory Stick.” Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator
disappears.
2
REW
PLAY
FF
[a ][b ]
3
4
SFN
SFN
1 / 12
CAPTURE
640
640
PHOTO
PB
INDEX
FN
PB
INDEX
FN
PHOTO
[a ]: Number of recorded images
[b ]: Approximate number of images that can
be recorded on the “Memory Stick”
135
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s
Image size of still images
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Do not shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory Stick.”
Otherwise, image data may become damaged.
If “ ” appears on the screen
The inserted “Memory Stick” is incompatible with your camcorder because its format
does not conform with your camcorder. Check the format of the “Memory Stick.”
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback
Your camcorder stops momentarily.
Sound recorded on a tape
You cannot record audio from a tape.
Titles already recorded on cassettes
You cannot record titles on “Memory Stick”s. Titles do not appear while you are
recording a still image with PHOTO.
Recording date/time
The recording data (date/ time) when it is recorded on a “Memory Stick” is recorded.
Various settings are not recorded.
Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a “Memory Stick”.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press
the button.
136
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t
Before operation
Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.
The image of the external equipment is displayed on the screen.
(3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 135.
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
S VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO/
VIDEO
Yellow
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
VCR
: Signal flow
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video jack on the VCR or
the TV.
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
TV or VCR.
137
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )
DV IN/OUT
DV
DV OUT
: Signal flow
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)
Note
In the following instances, recording is interrupted or “
REC ERROR” is displayed,
and recording is not possible. Record distortion-free images.
– When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has
been repeatedly used for dubbing
– When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception
when a TV tuner unit is in use
138
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e
“ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the “Memory Stick” on the
moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape
or a “Memory Stick.” (However, you can record only superimposed still images on the
“Memory Stick.”)
M. CHROM (memory chroma key)
You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a
moving picture.
M. LUMI (memory luminance key)
You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title
with a moving picture. Record a title on the “Memory Stick” before a trip or event for
convenience.
C. CHROM (camera chroma key)
You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image such as an image that can be
used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the
moving picture will be swapped with a still image.
M. OVERLAP* (memory overlap)
You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image recorded on the “Memory
Stick” as the overlap.
Still image
Moving picture
M. CHROM
CAM
M
CHROM
Blue
Still image
Moving picture
Moving picture
Blue
M. LUMI
M
CAM
L UM I
Still image
Still image
C. CHROM
CAM
M
CHROM
Moving picture
M. OVERLAP*
OV ER –
L A P
* The superimposed image using Memory overlap can be recorded on tapes only.
139
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a t a p e
Before operation
• Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” recorded still images into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the
lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.
(4) Press –/ + on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which
you want to superimpose.
– : To see the previous image
+: To see the next image
(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.
(6) Press –/ + on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press
OK to return to PAGE1.
M. CHROM:
M. LUMI:
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a
still image and superimpose it on a moving image
Brightness level used when extracting a still image and
superimposing it on a moving image
C. CHROM:
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a
moving picture and superimpose it on a still image
M. OVERLAP: No adjustment necessary
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.
(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.
(8) Press START/ STOP to start recording.
140
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
1
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
MEM MIX
3,4
OFF MCCAM OVER-
OK
LUMI
LAP
MEM
MIX
CAMCM MCCAM
CHROM CHROM
Still image
100–0001
–
+
MEM MIX
OFF
2
5
6
OK
M. LUMI
–
–
+
+
100–0001
+
FN
–
+
–
MEM MIX
OFF
OK
M. LUMI
100–0001
+
–
+
–
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d
Press –/ + on the right lower corner before step 6.
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX
Press
OFF to return to PAGE1.
Notes
• You cannot use the MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on “Memory Stick”s.
• When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of
the picture may not be clear.
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment
You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.
When you select M. OVERLAP
You cannot change the still image or the mode setting.
During recording
You cannot change the mode setting.
To record the superimposed image as a still image
Press PHOTO deeper in step 8 (You should set PHOTO REC in
menu settings beforehand).
to TAPE in the
141
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” a s a st ill
im a g e
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” recorded still images into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN and select PAGE2.
(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the
lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.
(4) Press –/ + on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which
you want to superimpose.
– : To see the previous image
+: To see the next image
(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.
(6) Press –/ + on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press
OK to return to PAGE2.
M. CHROM:
M. LUMI:
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a
still image and superimpose it on a moving image
Brightness level used when extracting a still image and
superimposing it on a moving image
C. CHROM:
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a
moving picture and superimpose it on a still image
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.
(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.
(8) Press PHOTO deeper to start recording.
The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a “Memory Stick.”
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.
142
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e
– MEMORY MIX
1
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
MEM MIX
3,4
OFF MCCAM
OK
LUMI
MEM
MIX
CAMCM MCCAM
CHROM CHROM
Still image
100–0001
+
–
MEM MIX
OFF
2
5
6
OK
M. LUMI
–
–
+
+
100–0001
+
FN
–
+
–
MEM MIX
OFF
OK
M. LUMI
100–0001
+
–
+
–
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d
Press –/ + on the right lower corner before step 6.
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX
Press
OFF to return to PAGE2.
Notes
• You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on “Memory Stick”s.
• When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of
the picture may not be clear.
Image size of still pictures
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.
Image data modified w ith your computers or shot w ith other equipment
You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.
During recording
You cannot change the mode setting.
When recording images on a “Memory Stick” using the MEMORY MIX
The PROGRAM AE does not work. (The indicator flashes.)
The “Memory Stick” supplied w ith your camcorder stores 20 images
– For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001~100-0018
– For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 100-0019~100-0020
Sample images
Sample images stored in the “Memory Stick” supplied with your camcorder are
protected (p. 167).
143
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n “ Me m o ry
St ick” s – MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
You can record moving pictures with sound on “Memory Stick”s.
The picture and sound and recorded up to the capacity of “Memory Stick” (MPEG
MOVIE EX).
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording
lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up. The picture and sound
are recorded up to the remaining capacity of “Memory Stick”. For more
information about recording time, see page 125.
:
40min 320REC
0:00 03
2
15min
[a ]
BBB
[b ]
PLAY INDEX
FN
[a ]:
Recording time that can be recorded on
the “Memory Stick”.
[a ] [b ]: These indicators are displayed for five
seconds after pressing START/ STOP.
This indicator is not recorded.
To st o p re co rd in g
Press START/ STOP.
144
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
Note
Sound is recorded in monaural.
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
The following functions do not work:
– Wide mode
– Digital zoom
– SteadyShot
– Super NightShot
– Color Slow Shutter
– Fader
– Picture effect
– Digital effect
– Title
– Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)
When using an external flash (optional)
Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on “Memory
Stick”s. Otherwise, the charging sound for the flash may be recorded.
Recording date/time
The date/ time are not displayed while recording. However, they are automatically
recorded onto the “Memory Stick.”
To display the recording date/ time, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also
use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 42). Various settings cannot be
recorded.
During recording on “Memory Stick”
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. During ejecting the tape, sound is
recorded on the “Memory Stick.”
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER
switch is set to CAMERA.
145
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
Se lf-t im e r MPEG m o vie re co rd in g
You can record moving pictures on “Memory Stick”s with the self-timer. You can also
use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(3) Press SELFTIMER.
The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.
(4) Press START/ STOP.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.
START/STOP
2
FN
4
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n
Press START/ STOP. To restart the self-timer, press START/ STOP again.
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r
Press SELFTIMER so that the
(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen. You
cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:
– Self-timer recording is finished.
– The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.
146
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g
p ict u re
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a
moving picture on a “Memory Stick.” Your camcorder can also capture moving picture
data through the input connector and record it as a moving picture on a “Memory
Stick.”
Before operation
• Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.
And press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.
(3) Press START/ STOP on your camcorder. The picture and sound are recorded
up to the remaining capacity of the “Memory Stick”. For more information
about recording time, see page 125.
:
:
:
40min
N
0 15 42 43
3
:
320REC 0:00 03
15min
[a ]
BBB
[b ]
PB
INDEX
FN
[a ]:
The recording time that can be
recorded on the “Memory Stick.”
2
PLAY
PAUSE
[a ] [b ]: This indicator is displayed for
five seconds after pressing START/
STOP. This indicator is not recorded.
To st o p re co rd in g
Press START/ STOP.
147
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
Notes
• Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording images from
a tape to “Memory Stick”s.
• Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from tape.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Do not shake or knock the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a “Memory
Stick”. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.
Titles already recorded on cassettes
You cannot record titles on “Memory Stick”s. Titles do not appear while you are
recording moving picture with START/ STOP.
If “
AUDIO ERROR” is displayed
Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded. Connect the A/ V
connecting cable to input images from external equipment used to play back the image
(p. 149).
Recording date/time
The recording data (date/ time) when it is recorded on “Memory Stick” is recorded.
Various settings are not recorded.
Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a “Memory Stick”.
148
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t
Before operation
Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.
The image of the other equipment is displayed on the screen.
(3) Follow the procedure on page 147 from the step 3 onwards at the point where
you want to start recording from.
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le
S VIDEO
OUT
AUDIO/
VIDEO
Yellow
White
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
VCR
: Signal flow
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)
Red
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V
connecting cable.
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the
TV or VCR.
149
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )
DV
DV IN/OUT
DV OUT
: Signal flow
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)
Note
In the following instances, “
REC ERROR” is displayed and you cannot record
pictures.
– When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has
been repeatedly used for dubbing
– When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception
when a TV tuner unit is in use
– When the input signal is cut off
During recording on “Memory Stick”
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder.
150
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s
a m o vin g p ict u re – Dig it a l p ro g ra m
e d it in g (o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s)
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto “Memory Stick”s.
Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Insert the tape for playback, and a “Memory Stick” for recording into your
camcorder.
(3) Press MENU and turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in
then press the dial (p. 209).
,
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE and select the desired
image size, then press the dial.
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video
operation buttons, then pause playback.
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.
(7) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to
select MARK, the press the dial.
The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark
changes to light blue.
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video
operation buttons, then pause playback.
(9) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program
mark changes to light blue.
(10)Repeat steps 6 to 9, then set the program.
When one program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.
You can set 20 programs in maximum.
6,8
REW
PLAY
STOP
FF
PAUSE
MENU
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT
N X 0 08 55 06
OUT
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
N X 0 08 58 06
IN
VIDEO EDIT
MARK
N X 0 10 01 23
IN
MARK
1
2
4
7
9
10
UNDO
UNDO
UNDO
ERASE ALL
START
ERASE ALL
START
IMAGESIZE
ERASE ALL
START
IMAGESIZE
IMAGESIZE
:
:
:
:
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00
SCENE
TOTAL 0 00 12
SCENE
TOTAL 0 00 31
SCENE
0
2min
1
2min
3
2min
320
320
320
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
151
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s)
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t
Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.
To cancel erasing
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,
then select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then select EXECUTE,
then press the dial.
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.
To cancel erasing all programs
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.
To cancel a program you have set
Press MENU.
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.
Notes
• You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory.
• You cannot operate recording during the Digital program editing on “Memory
Stick”s.
On a blank portion of the tape
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portions of the tape.
If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape
The total time code may not be displayed correctly.
During making a program
If you eject the cassette, NOT READY appears on the screen. The program will be
erased.
152
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s)
Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,
then select MEMORY, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then select EXECUTE, then
press the dial.
Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.
The program mark flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator
appears during writing of data on your camcorder, and REC appears during
dubbing on the screen.
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete.
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g
Press x using the video operation buttons.
The program you made is recorded on a “Memory Stick” up to the place where you
pressed x.
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO
EDIT in the menu settings.
Press MENU to end the Digital program editing.
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen w hen:
– The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.
– The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.
When “Memory Stick” does not have enough space to record
LOW MEMORY appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures up to the
time indicated.
153
Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e
– PHOTO SAVE
Using the search function, you can automatically capture only still images from tapes
and record them on a “Memory Stick” in sequence.
Before operation
• Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU and turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE in
, then press the dial (p. 204).
PHOTO BUTTON appears on the screen.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still images from the tape are recorded on the
“Memory Stick.” The number of still images copied is displayed. END is
displayed when copying ends.
:
:
:
:
:
:
PHOTO SAVE
0 00 00 00
PHOTO SAVE
0 30 00 00
3
2
4/15
640STD
8/15
640STD
SAVING
END
0
4
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
PHOTO
:
:
:
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
PHOTO SAVE
FILE NO.
PHOTO SAVE
0 00 00 00
4/15
640STD
READY
RETURN
PHOTO BUTTON
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
[
] :
PHOTO START MENU END
MENU
To st o p co p yin g
Press MENU or x.
Wh e n t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” b e co m e s fu ll
MEMORY FULL appears on the screen, and copying stops. Insert another “Memory
Stick” and repeat the procedure from step 2.
154
Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e – PHOTO SAVE
Image size of still images
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Do not shake or knock your camcorder. As well do not turn the power off, eject a
“Memory Stick”. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
NOT READY appears when you select the item in the menu settings.
When you change “Memory Stick”s during copying
Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous
“Memory Stick.”
155
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s
– Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck
You can play back still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can also play back
six images including moving pictures in order at a time by selecting the index screen.
You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PLAY or
PB. The last recorded image is displayed.
(3) Press –/ + on your camcorder to select the desired still image.
– : To see the previous image
+: To see the next image
2
PB
PLAY
To st o p Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck
Press CAM, VCR on your camcorder or MEMORY PLAY button on the Remote
Commander.
156
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck
You may not be able to play back images w ith your camcorder:
– When playing back image data modified on your computer.
– When playing back image data shot with other equipment.
Notes on the file name
• The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed
if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.
• “
- DIRECTORY ERROR” may appear on screen if the structure of the directory
does not conform to the DCF standard. While this message appears, you can play back
images but cannot record them on the “Memory Stick.”
• The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.
To play back recorded images on a TV screen
• Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder.
• When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, image quality
may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good
as ever.
• Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be
output from the TV speakers.
Still image
You can select still images also with –/ + on PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.
When no image is recorded on the “Memory Stick”
When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, “
NO FILE” appears.
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck
Image size
Image number/ Total number of recorded images
6/100
MEMORY PLAY
1360
100–0006
Print mark
Protect
JUL 4 2002
12:05:56 AM
Recording date/ time/ various settings
–
+
CAM INDEX
FN
When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is
displayed instead of CAM
Data Directory Number, File Number
Recording data
You can view recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) when you
press DATA CODE on PAGE2. You can also use the Remote Commander for this
operation.
To make screen indicators disappear
Press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL.
157
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck
Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )
You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when
searching for a particular image.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.
A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index
screen mode.
T : To display the previous six images
t : To display the following six images
B mark
-
MARK
MARK
DEL
2
EXIT
3
1
4
5
6
T
1 / 40
t
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )
Press the image you want to display.
Note
When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This
indicates the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick.” These
numbers are different from the data file names.
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment
These files are sometimes not displayed on the index screen.
158
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s
– MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
You can play back moving pictures recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can also play
back six images including still images in order at a time by selecting the index screen.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PLAY or
PB.
(3) Press –/ + to select the desired moving pictures.
– : To see the previous picture
+ : To see the next picture
(4) Press MPEG N X to start playback.
(5) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.
– : To turn down
+ : To turn up
When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted.
VOLUME
2
PB
PLAY
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
Press MPEG N X.
You may not be able to play back images w ith your camcorder:
– When playing back image data modified on your computer.
– When playing back image data shot with other equipment.
To play back recorded picutres on a TV screen
• Before operation connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder.
• Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be
output from the TV speakers.
Moving picture
You can select moving pictures also with –/ + on PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.
When no image is recorded on the “Memory Stick”
When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, “
NO FILE” appears.
159
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s – MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
Pla yin g b a ck a m o vin g p ict u re fro m t h e d e sire d p a rt
The moving picture recorded on “Memory Stick” is divided into 23 parts.
You can select every each one point and play back pictures.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press PLAY or
PB.
(3) Press +/ – to select the desired moving pictures.
– : To see the previous picture
+ : To see the next picture
(4) Press </ , to select the point where you want to play back.
< :To see previous part
, :To see next part
1/2
00 00
320
:
:
MOV00001
0
MPEG
N X
–
+
CAM INDEX
FN
(5) Press MPEG N X to start playback.
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
Press MPEG N X.
When recording time is too short
The moving picture may not be divided into 23 parts.
160
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s – MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck
Image size
Picture number/ Total number of recorded pictures
1/20
01 00
320
:
:
MOV00001
0
MPEG
N X
–––
JUL 4 2002
Protect
12 : 05 : 56
–
+
CAM INDEX
FN
When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is
displayed instead of CAM.
Recording date/ time. (Various settings are displayed as “– – –”.)
Data directory number/ File number
Recording date/time
You can view recording date/ time when you press DATA CODE on PAGE2. Various
settings are not recorded. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.
(p. 42)
To make screen indicator disappear
Press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL.
161
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry
St ick” s t o t a p e
You can copy images recorded on “Memory Stick”s and record them to tape.
Before operation
• Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.
• Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Using the video control buttons, search a point where you want to record the
desired images. Set the tape to playback pause.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder.
The tape is set to the recording pause.
(4) Press
PB. The last recorded image is displayed.
(5) Press +/ – to select the desired image.
– : To see the previous image
+ : To see the next image
(6) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop.
z appears on the screen during recording.
(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 5 and 6.
4
PB
3
2
REC
PAUSE
To st o p co p yin g in t h e m id d le
Press x.
162
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s t o t a p e
During copying
You cannot operate the following functions:
– MEMORY PLAY
– MEMORY INDEX
– MEMORY DELETE
– MEMORY +/ –
Note on the index screen
You cannot record the index screen.
If you press EDITSEARCH during pause
Memory playback stops.
Image data modified on your computers or shot w ith other equipment
You may not be able to copy modified images with your camcorder.
When copying movies
After step 6, press the MPEG N X and play back the image.
163
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n
“ Me m o ry St ick” s – Me m o ry PB ZOOM
You can enlarge still images recorded on a “Memory Stick.” You can select and view a
desired part from the enlarged still image. Also, you can copy the desired part of the
enlarged still image to tapes or “Memory Stick”s.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Press FN
to display PAGE1 during the memory playback (p. 120).
When you set the POWER switch to VCR, press FN and select PAGE2 during
the memory playback (p. 24).
(2) Press PB ZOOM. PB ZOOM screen appears.
(3) Press the area that you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen.
The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback
image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area,
the area moves to the center of the screen.
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.
You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its
size.
W : Decreases the zoom ratio
T : Increases the zoom ratio
3/14
1360
PB ZOOM
× 5.0
4
MEMORY PLAY
T
W
1
2
100–0003
END
FN
3/14
1360
PB ZOOM
PB
ZOOM
MEMORY PLAY
100–0003
END
To ca n ce l PB ZOOM
Press
END.
164
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
– Me m o ry PB ZOOM
The PB ZOOM is canceled w hen the follow ing operations:
– MENU
– MEMORY PLAY
– MEMORY INDEX
– MEMORY +/ –
Moving pictures recorded on “Memory Stick”s
The PB ZOOM does not work.
To record the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM on “Memory Stick”s
Press the PHOTO button to record the still image processed by PB ZOOM. (Images are
recorded at 640 × 480 size.)
In the PB ZOOM mode
If you press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen
disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.
Edge of the enlarged image
The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.
To record an image proceeded on PB ZOOM on tapes
Record an image following the procedure on page 162.
165
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s in a co n t in u o u s lo o p
– SLIDE SHOW
You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially
when checking recorded images or during a presentation.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.
(3) Press SLIDE SHOW.
(4) Press START. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on a “Memory
Stick” in sequence.
2
FN
SLIDE SHOW
100–0001
1 / 6
1360
4
1
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
LOCK
MEMORY/
NETWORK
PAUSE
–
+
END
To st o p t h e slid e sh o w
Press
END.
To p a u se d u rin g a slid e sh o w
Press PAUSE.
To re t u rn t o FN
Press
END to return to PAGE3, then press EXIT.
To st a rt t h e slid e sh o w fro m a p a rt icu la r im a g e
Select the desired image using –/ + buttons before step 4.
To view recorded images on TV
Before operation connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/ V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder.
If you change the “Memory Stick” during operation
The slide show does not operate. If you change the “Memory Stick,” be sure to follow
the steps again from the beginning.
166
Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re
– Im a g e p ro t e ct io n
You can protect selected images to prevent accidental erasure of important images.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX on your camcorder to display the index.
(3) Press - MARK. The screen to protect the image appears.
(4) Press the image you want to protect. The “-” appears on the protected
image.
2
INDEX
-
MARK
MARK
DEL
2
EXIT
3
RET.
-
-
MARK
EXIT
3
1
4
1
4
2
5
3,4
5
6
6
-MARK
T
1 / 40
t
T
2 / 40
t
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n
Press the image you want to cancel image protection in step 4 again. The “-”
disappears.
Note
Formatting erases all information on the “Memory Stick,” including the protected
image data. Before formatting a “Memory Stick”, check its contents.
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
You cannot protect images.
167
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE
You can delete images stored in a “Memory Stick.” You can delete all images or only
selected images.
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image you want to delete.
(3) Press FN to display PAGE1.
(4) Press DELETE. “DELETE?” appears on the LCD screen.
(5) Press OK. The selected image is deleted.
3
FN
3 / 40
DELETE
100–0003
1360
4
DELETE?
DELE–
TE
OK
CAN–
CEL
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e
Press CANCEL in step 5.
Notes
• To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.
• Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Before deleting an image, carefully
check the image.
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
You cannot delete images.
168
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s o n t h e in d e x scre e n
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.
(3) Press DEL. Then press the images you want to delete. The number of the
selected image is highlighted.
(4) Press EXEC. “DELETE?” appears on the LCD screen.
(5) Press OK. The selected images are deleted.
2
INDEX
-
MARK
MARK
DEL
2
EXIT
3
RET.
DEL
-
EXEC
2
EXIT
3
1
4
1
4
3
5
6
5
6
DEL
T
1 / 40
t
T
3 / 40
t
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e
Press CANCEL in step 5.
169
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE
De le t in g a ll im a g e s
You can delete all unprotected images in a “Memory Stick.”
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL in
, then press the dial (p. 204).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes
to EXECUTE.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.
DELETING flashes on the screen. When all unprotected images are deleted,
COMPLETE is displayed.
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
FILE NO.
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
2
3
4
FILE NO.
DELETE ALL READY
FORMAT
DELETE ALL RETURN
FORMAT
RETURN
OK
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
FILE NO.
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
FILE NO.
DELETE ALL RETURN
DELETE ALL RETURN
FORMAT
RETURN
OK
FORMAT
RETURN
EXECUTE
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
FILE NO.
DELETE ALL DELETING
FORMAT
RETURN
MEMORY SET
STILL SET
MOVIE SET
FILE NO.
DELETE ALL COMPLETE
FORMAT
RETURN
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”
Select RETURN in step 3 or 4.
While DELETING appears
Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.
170
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk – PRINT MARK
You can specify a recorded still image to print out by writing a print mark. This
function is useful for printing out still images later.
Your camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for
specifying still images to print out.
Before operation
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.
(3) Press
MARK. The screen to write a print mark appears.
(4) Press the image you want to write a print mark. The “
” appears on the
selected image.
2
INDEX
-
MARK
MARK
DEL
2
EXIT
3
RET.
MARK
EXIT
3
1
4
1
4
2
5
3,4
5
6
6
MARK
T
1 / 40
t
T
2 / 40
t
To re t u rn t o FN
Press EXIT.
To ca n ce l w rit in g p rin t m a rks
Press the image you want to cancel the print mark in step 4 again . The
disappears.
If the w rite-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK
You cannot write print marks on still images.
Moving pictures
You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.
171
Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r
You can use the optional printer on your camcorder to print images on print paper.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.
There are various ways of printing still images. The following describes the setup for
print by selecting
in the menu settings and the set up for print setup by selecting
9PIC PRINT on the touch panel on your camcorder.
Before operation
• Insert a recorded “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
• Attach the optional printer to your camcorder as illustrated.
Printer
FN
MENU
Se t t in g w it h t h e m e n u
You can print DATE/ TIME on print paper.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select DATE/ TIME in
, then press the dial (p. 205).
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.
DATE
DAY & TIME
:
4 12 00AM
JUL 4 2002
172
Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r
Se t t in g w it h t h e t o u ch p a n e l
You can make 9 stickers on a single sheet when you print images recorded on a
“Memory Stick” in 9PIC PRINT.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.
(3) Press 9PIC PRINT.
(4) Press the desired mode.
SAME PICS
MULTI PICS or MARKED PICS*
* Nine still images with print marks are printed together.
Moving pictures recorded on “Memory Stick”
You cannot print moving pictures.
When “Memory Stick” has no files
“
NO STILL IMAGE FILE” appears on the screen.
When there are no files w ith a PRINT MARK
NO PRINT MARK” appears on the screen.
“
Images processed by 9PIC PRINT
You cannot insert a DATE/ TIME indicator.
Images recorded in the MULTI SCRN
You cannot print images recorded in the multi screen mode on sticker type print paper.
173
— Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g yo u r Co m p u t e r —
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– In t ro d u ct io n
There are the following ways of connecting the camcorder to a computer in order to
view images saved on a “Memory Stick” or recorded on tape on your computer.
To view images on a computer which has a Memory Stick slot, first eject the “Memory
Stick” from the camcorder and then insert it into the computer’s Memory Stick slot.
Camcorder
Connection jack
Connection
cable
Computer environment
requirements
USB cable
(supplied)
USB connector,
editing software
USB jack
DV jack
Tape stills and
movies
i.LINK cable
(DV connecting
cable ) (optional)
DV connector,
editing software
“Memory Stick”
stills and movies
USB cable
(supplied)
USB connector,
editing software
USB jack
When connecting to a computer via the USB jack, complete installation of the
USB driver before connecting the camcorder to the computer. If you connect
the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not be able to install the USB
driver correctly.
For details about your computer’s connectors and editing software, contact the
computer manufacturer.
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ja ck
For more information, see page 177.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
174
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e DV ja ck
Your computer must have a DV connector and editing software installed that can read
video signals.
DV IN/ OUT
DV connector
is marked on this side
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)
: Signal flow
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ja ck
There are two methods of USB connection, NORMAL and PTP. The default setting is
NORMAL. Here we explain how to use the camcorder with a standard USB connection
(NORMAL).
See page 177 when using Windows and page 193 when using Macintosh.
(USB) jack
USB connector
USB cable (supplied)
You can also use a Memory Stick Reader/ Writer (optional).
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB ja ck
Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for Memory
Stick.
When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended
operating environment.
175
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n
No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r
“ Me m o ry St ick”
• “Memory Stick” operations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a “Memory Stick”
formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the “Memory Stick” in
your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was
connected.
• Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Compressed files cannot be played
back on your camcorder.
So ft w a re
• Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a
still image file.
• When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to
your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image
format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open
the file.
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.
176
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to
the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not
be able to install the USB driver correctly.
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to
the computer’s USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,
along with the application software required for viewing images.
If you connect your camcorder and your computer using the USB cable, you can view
pictures live from your camcorder and pictures recorded on a tape on your computer
(USB streaming function).
Furthermore, if you download pictures from your camcorder to your computer, you can
process or edit them in image processing software and append them to e-mail.
You can view images recorded on a “Memory Stick” on your computer.
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g
via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g t a p e im a g e s o n t h e co m p u t e r
OS:
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP
Home Edition or Windows XP Professional
Standard installation is required.
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.
You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still
images.
CPU:
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)
Application:
DirectX 8.0a or later
Sound system:
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers
Memory:
64 MB or more
Hard disk:
Available memory required for installation:
at least 200MB
Available hard disc memory recommended:
at least 1GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)
Display:
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot Hi color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors),
Direct Draw display driver capability (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this
product will not operate correctly.)
Others:
This product is compatible with DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.
177
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g
via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g “ Me m o ry St ick” im a g e s o n t h e
co m p u t e r
OS:
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional
Standard installation is required.
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.
CPU:
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).
Notes
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is
used simultaneously.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments
mentioned above.
• Windows and Windows Media are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries.
• Pentium is trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not
mentioned in each case in this manual.
178
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r
Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to your
computer.
Connect the USB cable according to “Making the computer recognize the
camcorder”.
If you are using Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Home Edition/
Professional, log in with permission of Administrators.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The
application software starts up and the title screen appears.
(3) Move the cursor to USB Driver and click. This starts USB driver installation.
(4) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.
(5) Remove the CD-ROM and then restart the computer, in accordance with the
instructions on the screen.
Note
If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver
will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again in accordance with the steps
on page 182.
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional users
If you go to USBCONNECT in the menu settings and select PTP, you can copy
“Memory Stick” images from the camcorder onto your computer without installing the
USB driver. This is ideal for simply copying images from a camcorder onto a computer.
Refer to page 207 for details.
179
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e
Refer to page 181 for details on viewing “Memory Stick” images on your computer.
You need to install PIXELA ImageMixer to view images recorded on a tape on your
computer. Install it from the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.
To install and use this software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized
as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional, you
must be authorized as Administrators.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
If you are using your computer, close all running applications.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
The application software starts up and the title screen appears. If the title
screen does not appear, double-click “My Computer” and then “ImageMixer”
(CD-ROM Drive). The application software screen appears after a while.
(3) Move the cursor to “PIXELA ImageMixer” and click.
The Install Wizard program starts up and the “Select Settings Language”
screen appears.
(4) Select the language for installation.
(5) Follow the on-screen messages.
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.
(6) Click DirectX.
Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX.
Restart your computer when the installation is completed.
(7) Connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder.
(8) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(9) Select USB STREAM in
to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).
(10)With the CD-ROM inserted, connect the USB jacks of the camcorder and
computer using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.
Your computer recognizes the camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware
Wizard starts.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
180
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
(11)Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts
three times because three different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow
the installation to complete without interrupting it.
For Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional users
(12)After the “File Needed” screen appears.
Open “Browse...” t “My Computer” t “ImageMixer” t “Sonyhcb.sys”,
and click “OK”.
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n “ Me m o ry St ick” s
Before operation
Set USBCONNECT in
NORMAL.)
to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is
(1) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder. Your computer
recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts
two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the
installation to complete without interrupting it.
You cannot install the USB driver if a “Memory Stick” is not in your camcorder.
Be sure to insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder before installing the USB
driver.
181
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following
procedure to correctly install the USB driver.
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
2 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR.
3 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your
camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.
4 Open your computer’s “Device Manager”.
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional:
Select “Start” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware”, and click the
“Device Manager” button.
If there is no “System” inside “Pick a category” after clicking “Control Panel”,
click “Switch to classic view” instead.
Window s 2000 Professional:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware” tab,
and click the “Device Manager” button.
Window s 98SE/Window s Me:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System”, and click “Device
Manager”.
182
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
5 Select and delete the underlined devices below.
Window s 98SE
Window s Me
Window s 2000 Professional
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional
183
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
6 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then
disconnect the USB cable.
7 Restart your computer.
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM
Perform the entire procedure described in “Installing the USB driver” on page 179.
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”
Step1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
2 Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.
3 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
4 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your
camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.
5 Open your computer’s “Device Manager”.
Window s 2000 Professional:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System” t “Hardware”, and
click the “Device Manager” button.
Other OS:
Select “My Computer” t “Control Panel” t “System”, and click “Device
Manager”.
6 Select “Other devices”.
Select the device prefixed with the “?” mark and delete.
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam
7 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then
disconnect the USB cable.
8 Restart your computer.
Step2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM
Perform the entire procedure described in “Installing the USB driver” on page 179.
184
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n
yo u r co m p u t e r – Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h “ PIXELA Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”
You need to install the USB driver and PIXELA ImageMixer to view images recorded
on a tape on your computer (p. 179).
To install and use the software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized
as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional, you
must be authorized as Administrators.
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor, and insert a cassette into your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
Select USB STREAM in
to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).
(4) Select “Start” t “Programs” t “PIXELA” t “ImageMixer” t “PIXELA
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”.
(5) Click
on the screen.
The “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” startup screen appears on your
computer. The title screen appears.
185
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
(6) Select
.
Preview window
(7) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
(USB) jack
USB connector
Push into the end
USB cable (supplied)
(8) Press N to start playback.
The picture from the tape appears on preview window on your computer.
186
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Vie w in g p ict u re s live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r
(1) Follow the steps 1, 2 on page 185.
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
Select USB STREAM in
to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).
(3) Follow the steps 4 to 7 on pages 185, 186.
The picture from your camcorder appears on preview window on your
computer.
Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s
Preview window
Thumbnail list widow
(1) Select
.
(2) Looking at the preview window, move the cursor to
point you want to capture.
and press it at the
The still image on the screen is captured.
Captured images are displayed in the thumbnail list window.
187
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s
Preview window
Thumbnail list widow
(1) Select
(2) Look at the preview window and click on
you want to capture. changes to
(3) Look at the preview window and click on
.
at the first scene of the movie
at the last scene you want to
.
capture. The captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.
Notes
• The following may occur while using your camcorder, and are not due to any
malfunction.
– The image shakes up and down.
– Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.
– Images of different color systems to that of the camcorder are not displayed correctly.
• When your camcorder is in the standby with a cassette inserted, it turns off
automatically after five minutes.
• We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your
camcorder is in the standby, and no cassette is inserted.
• Indicators in the camcorder LCD screen do not appear on images that are captured into
your computer.
188
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Reinstall the USB driver
following the procedure on page 182.
If any trouble occurs
Close all running applications, then restart your computer.
Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:
– Disconnect the USB cable.
– Change the POWER switch to the other position or set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) on your camcorder.
Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f “ PIXELA
Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”
A “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” on-line help site is available where you can
find the detailed operating method of “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”.
(1) Click
located in the upper-right corner of the screen.
The ImageMixer’s Manual screen appears.
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.
To close on-line help
Click
at the top right of the screen.
If you have any questions about “PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”
“ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony” is a trademark of PIXELA corporation. For more
information, refer to the instruction manual of the CD-ROM supplied with your
camcorder.
No t e o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.
189
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Vie w in g im a g e s
Before operation
• You need to install the USB driver to view “Memory Stick” images on your computer.
(p. 179)
An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving
pictures in Windows environment.
• Set USBCONNECT in
to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is
NORMAL.)
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.
(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, and connect the AC power
adaptor to your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.
(USB) jack
USB connector
USB cable (supplied)
(5) Open “My Computer” on Windows and double-click the newly recognized
drive (Example: “Removable Disk (E:)”).
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.
190
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.
For the detailed folder and file name, see “Image file storage destinations and
image files”.
Desired file type
Still image
Double-click in this order
“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder
“Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file*
t
Image file
Moving picture*
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If
you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image and sound may
break off.
Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s
Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders by recording mode.
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within
the range from 0001 to 9999.
Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs
(Th e d rive re co g n izin g yo u r ca m co rd e r is [E:].)
Folder containing still image data
Folder containing moving picture data
Folder
File
Meaning
100MSDCF
MOML0001
DSC0ssss.JPG
MOV0ssss.MPG
Still image file
Moving picture file
191
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Win d o w s u se rs
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF(CHG).
– For Window s 2000 Professional/Me, Window s XP Home Edition/Professional
users
To unplug the USB cable, eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF
(CHG) follow the procedure below.
(1) Move the cursor to the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon on the Task Tray and
click to cancel the applicable drive.
(2) After the “Safe to remove” message appears, disconnect the USB cable and
eject the “Memory Stick” or set the POWER switch to OFF(CHG).
192
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to
the computer’s USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,
along with the application software required for viewing images.
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g
via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g “ Me m o ry St ick” im a g e s o n t h e
co m p u t e r
Mac OS 8.5.1/ 8.6/ 9.0/ 9.1/ 9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1)
Standard installation is required.
However, note that the upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/ 9.1 should be used for the following
models.
• iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive
• iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation
The USB connector must be provided as standard.
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed (to play back moving pictures).
Notes
• Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.
• Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is
used simultaneously.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments
mentioned above.
• Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not
mentioned in each case in this manual.
193
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le
– Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r
Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB
driver is completed.
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users
(1) Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.
The application software screen appears.
(3) Click the “USB Driver” to open the folder containing the six files related to
“Driver.”
(4) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.
• Sony Camcorder USB Driver
• Sony Camcorder USB Shim
(5) When the message appears, click “OK.”
The USB driver is installed on your computer.
(6) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.
(7) Restart your computer.
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)
The USB driver need not be installed. Your Mac is automatically recognized as a drive
just by connecting your Mac using the USB cable.
194
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a “ Me m o ry
St ick” o n yo u r co m p u t e r
– Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs
Vie w in g im a g e s
Before operation
You need to install the USB driver to view “Memory Stick” images on your computer.
(p. 194)
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Mac OS to load.
(2) Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder, and connect the AC power
adaptor to your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your
computer using the supplied USB cable.
USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.
(5) Double-click the “Memory Stick” icon on the desktop.
The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.
Desired file type
Still image
Double-click in this order
“Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder
“Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file*
t
Image file
Moving picture*
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If
you play back the file directly from the “Memory Stick,” the image and sound may
break off.
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o r se t
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF(CHG)
Follow the procedure below.
(1) Close all running applications.
Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.
(2) Drag the “Memory Stick” icon into the “Trash”. Alternatively, select the
“Memory Stick” icon by clicking on it, and then select “Eject disk” from the
“Special” menu at the top left of the screen.
(3) Disconnect the USB cable and eject the “Memory Stick” or the POWER switch
to OFF (CHG).
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users
Shut down your computer, then disconnect the USB cable and eject the “Memory Stick”
or the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
195
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it
o n yo u r co m p u t e r – Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n
You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connected to your
computer which has the i.LINK (DV) jack connected to your camcorder.
Before operation
Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Press MENU, then select A/ V t DV OUT in
EXEC dial (p. 202).
to ON with the SEL/ PUSH
(3) Start playback on the analog video unit.
(4) Start procedures for capturing images and sound on your computer. The
operation procedures depend on your computer and the software you are
using.
For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your
computer and software you are using.
AUDIO/VIDEO
DV IN/OUT
VCR
OUT
Yellow
Red
i.LINK
White
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
A/ Vconnecting cable (supplied)
: Signal flow
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)
Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d
Stop capturing procedures on your computer , and stop the playback on the analog
video unit.
Notes
• You need to install software that supports the exchange video signals.
• Depending on the state of the video signals, the computer may not be able to output
the images correctly when you convert video signals into digital video signals via
your camcorder.
• You cannot record or capture the video output via your camcorder when the video
tapes include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.
• You can capture images and sound with an S video cable (optional) instead of the
A/ V connecting cable (supplied).
If your computer has a USB connector
You can connect using a USB cable, but images may not be transfered smoothly.
196
— Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n —
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk
– DCR-TRV50 o n ly
You can access the Internet using a Bluetooth equipped device that is complied to the
camcorder. Once the access is made, you can view a Web page, send/ receive your
e-mail, etc. This section describes only how to open the Network Menu.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK.
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.
(2) Press NETWORK.
(Bluetooth) lamp lights up and Network Menu appears.
For the details, refer to the Network Function Operating Instructions supplied with
your camcorder.
(Bluetooth) lamp
1
VCR
OFF(CHG)
CAMERA
LOCK
MEMORY/
NETWORK
NETWORK
197
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk
Ho w t o h o ld yo u r ca m co rd e r w h e n o p e ra t in g in NETWORK m o d e
Hold your camcorder with your hand through the grip belt to keep from dropping it.
The operation buttons needed in NETWORK mode are displayed on the LCD screen.
Press the buttons with the stylus supplied.
Aft e r u sin g t h e st ylu s
Put it back in the holder. Hold the stylus correctly as shown in the illustration and insert
it until it clicks.
On trademarks
• The BLUETOOTH trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Sony
Corporation under license.
• All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “TM” and “®” are not
mentioned in each case in this manual.
Note
Make sure that your camcorder is in the standby with the POWER switch set to
MEMORY/ NETWORK.
During using the netw ork function
You cannot use the optional printer.
198
— Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e
m e n u
To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon,
then the menu item and then the mode.
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only), press MENU.
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to
set.
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to
set.
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial
to set.
(5) If you want to change other items, select
RETURN and press the dial, then
repeat steps 2 to 4.
For details, see “Selecting the mode setting of each item” (p. 200).
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
TAPE SET
CAMERA
MANUAL SET
EFFECT
FLASH LVL
WHT BAL
N. S. LIGHT
AUTO SHTR
1
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
SP
2
3
4
P
RETURN
MENU
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
r
VCR
MANUAL SET
EFFECT
P
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
RETURN
AUTO
AUTO
ON
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
MEMORY/NETWORK*
MANUAL SET
FLASH LVL
WHT BAL
N. S. LIGHT
r
[
] :
MENU END
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
TAPE SET
REC MODE
AUDIO MODE
REMAIN
RETURN
AUTO
ON
ON
RETURN
[
] :
MENU END
[
] :
MENU END
* DCR-TRV50 only
(continued on the following page)
199
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
To m a ke t h e m e n u d isp la y d isa p p e a r
Press MENU.
Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:
MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
VCR SET
LCD/ VF SET
MEMORY SET
PRINT SET
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS
Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m z is the default setting.
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The screen shows
only the items you can operate at the moment.
The POWER switch is the name of the switch on the DCR-TRV50. It is referred to as
MEMORY on the DCR-TRV40.
POWER
Icon/item
MANUAL SET
Mode
Meaning
sw itch
P EFFECT
——
To add special effects like those in films or on
the TV to images (p. 60, 75)
VCR
CAMERA
FLASH LVL
HIGH
z NORMAL
LOW
Makes the flash level higher than normal.
Normal setting
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
Makes the flash level lower than normal.
To adjust the white balance (p. 54)
WHT BAL
N.S. LIGHT
——
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
z ON
To use the NightShot Light (p. 35)
To cancel the NightShot Light
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
OFF
AUTO SHTR z ON
To automatically activate the electronic shutter
when shooting in bright conditions
CAMERA
OFF
To not automatically activate the electronic
shutter even when shooting in bright conditions
Note on FLASH LVL
You cannot adjust FLASH LVL if the external flash (optional) is not compatible with the
flash level.
200
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
CAMERA SET
D ZOOM
Mode
Meaning
z OFF
20×
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10× zoom
is performed.
CAMERA
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to
20× zoom is performed digitally (p. 31)
120×
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to
120× zoom is performed digitally
PHOTO REC z MEMORY
To record still images on “Memory Stick”s when CAMERA
you press PHOTO in the tape recording or tape
recording standby (p. 47)
TAPE
To record still images on tape when you press
PHOTO in the tape recording or tape recording
standby (p. 52)
16:9WIDE
z OFF
——
CAMERA
CAMERA
ON
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 55)
To compensate for camera-shake
STEADYSHOT z ON
OFF
To cancel the SteadyShot. Natural pictures are
produced when shooting a stationary object
with a tripod.
FRAME REC
INT. REC
z OFF
ON
To deactivate Frame recording
To activate Frame recording (p. 74)
To activate interval recording (p. 72)
To deactivate interval recording
CAMERA
CAMERA
ON
z OFF
SET
To set the INTERVAL and REC TIME for
interval recording
HOLOGRAM F z AUTO
The HOLOGRAM AF emits when focusing on
subjects is difficult in dark places (p. 132)
MEMORY/
NETWORK
OFF
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit.
Notes on the SteadyShot
• The SteadyShot will not correct excessive camera-shake.
• Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot.
If you cancel the SteadyShot
The SteadyShot off indicator
appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive
compensation for camera-shake.
(continued on the following page)
201
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
VCR SET
Mode
Meaning
HiFi SOUND z STEREO
To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track
tape with main and sub sound (p. 221)
VCR
1
2
To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or
a dual sound tape with main sound
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound
or a dual sound track tape with sub sound
AUDIO MIX
——
To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and
stereo 2 (p. 109)
VCR
VCR
ST1
ST2
A/VtDV OUT z OFF
To output digital images and sound in analog
format using your camcorder
ON
To output analog images and sound in digital
format using your camcorder (p. 196)
LCD/VF SET
LCD B.L.
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to
VCR
normal
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
BRIGHT
To brighten the LCD screen
LCD COLOR
——
To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turn the
SEL/ PUSH EXE dial.
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
To get low-
intensity
To get high-
intensity
VF B.L.
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to VCR
normal
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
BRIGHT
To brighten the viewfinder screen
Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.
• When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during
recording.
• When you use power supplies other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically
selected.
Even if you adjust LCD B.L., LCD COLOR and/or VF B.L.
The recorded picture will not be affected.
202
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
MEMORY SET
Mode
Meaning
STILL SET
BURST
z OFF
To not record continuously.
MEMORY/
NETWORK
NORMAL
To record from three to nine images
continuously (p. 128)
HIGH SPEED
EXP BRKTG
To record up to 16 images continuously fast
To record three images continuously with
different exposure
MULTI SCRN To record nine images continuously, display the
images on a single page divided into nine boxes
z SUPER FINE
To record still images in the finest image quality VCR
QUALITY
mode (p. 122)
MEMORY/
NETWORK
FINE
To record still images in the fine image quality
mode
STANDARD
To record still images in the standard image
quality mode
IMAGESIZE z 1360 × 1020
To record still images at 1360 × 1020 size
(p. 124)
MEMORY/
NETWORK
640 × 480
To record still images at 640 × 480 size
MOVIE SET
z 320 × 240
To record moving pictures at 320 × 240 size
VCR
MEMORY/
NETWORK
IMAGESIZE
(p. 124).
160 × 112
To record moving pictures at 160 × 112 size.
REMAIN z AUTO
To display the remaining capacity of the
“Memory Stick” in the following cases:
• For five seconds after setting the POWER
switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) or VCR
VCR
MEMORY/
NETWORK
• For five seconds after setting the POWER
switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only) or VCR and inserting a “Memory
Stick”
• When the remaining capacity of the “Memory
Stick” is less than two minutes after setting the
POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK
(DCR-TRV50 only)
• For five seconds from the start of moving
picture recording
• For five seconds after completing a moving
picture recording
ON
To always display the remaining capacity of the
“Memory Stick”
(continued on the following page)
203
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
MEMORY SET
Mode
Meaning
——
z SERIES
RESET
——
To copy still images on tape onto “Memory
Stick” (p. 154).
VCR
PHOTO SAVE
To assign numbers to file in sequence even if the VCR
“Memory Stick” is changed
FILE NO.
MEMORY/
NETWORK
To reset the file numbering each time the
“Memory Stick” is changed
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
To delete all unprotected images (p. 170)
MEMORY/
NETWORK
z RETURN
To cancel formatting
MEMORY/
NETWORK
OK
To format an inserted “Memory Stick”
Formatting erases all information on the
“Memory Stick”
Check the contents of the “Memory Stick”
before formatting.
1. Select FORMAT.
2. Select OK with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial,
then press the dial.
3. After EXECUTE appears, press SEL/ PUSH
EXEC dial. FORMATTING flashes during
formatting. COMPLETE appears when
formatting is finished.
Notes on formatting
• Do not do any of the following while FORMATTING is displayed:
– Switch the POWER switch
– Operate buttons
– Eject the “Memory Stick”
• The supplied or optional “Memory Stick” has been formatted at factory. Formatting
“Memory Stick”s on your camcorder is not required.
• You cannot format the “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick”
is set to LOCK.
• Format the “Memory Stick” when
FORMAT ERROR is displayed.
• Formatting erases protected image data on the “Memory Stick.”
204
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
PRINT SET
DATE/TIME
Mode
Meaning
z OFF
To make prints without the recording date and
time
MEMORY/
NETWORK
DATE
To make prints with the recording date (p. 172)
To make prints with the recording date and time
DAY&TIME
CM SET
TITLE
——
——
To superimpose a title or make your own title
(p. 110, 113)
VCR
CAMERA
TITLEERASE
TITLE DSPL
To erase the title you have superimposed
(p. 112)
VCR
CAMERA
z ON
OFF
To display the title you have superimposed
To not display the title
VCR
VCR
CM SEARCH z ON
To search using cassette memory (p. 80, 81, 83)
To search without using cassette memory
To label a cassette (p. 115)
OFF
TAPE TITLE
ERASE ALL
——
VCR
CAMERA
——
To erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 116)
VCR
CAMERA
Note on PRINT SET
DATE/ TIME is displayed only when an external printer (optional) is connected to the
intelligent accessory shoe.
(continued on the following page)
205
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
TAPE SET
Mode
Meaning
z SP
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode
VCR
REC MODE
CAMERA
LP
To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the
SP mode
z 12BIT
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds)
VCR
CAMERA
AUDIO MODE
qREMAIN
16BIT
To record in the 16-bit mode (one stereo sound
with high quality)
z AUTO
To display the remaining tape bar:
• For about eight seconds after a cassette is
inserted and your camcorder calculates the
remaining amount of tape
VCR
CAMERA
• For about eight seconds after N or
DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL is pressed
ON
To always display the remaining tape indicator
Notes on the LP mode
• When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing
the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or
VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.
• When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/ Master
cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.
• You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the
tape to be audio dubbed.
• When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in
the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be
written properly between scenes.
Notes on AUDIO MODE
• You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.
• When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance
in AUDIO MIX.
206
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
Mode
Meaning
——
To set the date or time (p. 20).
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
USB STREAM z OFF
ON
To deactivate the USB streaming
To activate the USB streaming
VCR
CAMERA
USBCONNECT z NORMAL
To connect and recognize the “Memory Stick”
drive.
MEMORY/
NETWORK
PTP
To connect and only copy a “Memory Stick”
image from your camcorder to a computer (only
with Windows XP or Mac OS X)
1
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select
USBCONNECT followed by PTP, then press
the dial to set.
2
Insert the “Memory Stick” in the camcorder,
and connect the camcorder to the computer
using a USB cable. Copy Wizard will
automatically start up.
LTR SIZE
z NORMAL
To display selected menu items in normal size
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
2×
To display selected menu items at twice the
normal size
LANGUAGE
z ENGLISH
To display the following information indicators
in English: min, REC, STBY and START.
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
FRANÇAIS
To display the information indicators in French.
ESPAÑOL
To display the information indicators in
Spanish.
PORTUGUÊS To display the information indicators in
Portuguese.
To display the information indicators in
Chinese.
To display the information indicators in Korean.
z ON
DEMO MODE
To make the demonstration appear
To cancel the demonstration
CAMERA
OFF
Notes on DEMO MODE
• You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette or a “Memory Stick” is inserted in
your camcorder.
• When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, the “NIGHTSHOT” indicator appears on the screen
and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.
• The DEMO MODE default setting is STBY (Standby) and the demonstration starts
about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a
cassette and a “Memory Stick” inserted.
To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette or a “Memory Stick,” set the POWER
switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY (Standby)
again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu settings, turn the POWER switch to
OFF (CHG), and return the POWER switch to CAMERA.
(continued on the following page)
207
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
OTHERS
Mode
Meaning
DATA CODE*1
z DATE/ CAM
To display date, time and various settings
during playback when pressing DATA CODE
on the Remote Commander (p. 42)
VCR
MEMORY/
NETWORK
DATE
To display date and time during playback when
pressing DATA CODE on the Remote
Commander
AREA SET
DST SET*2
——
Temporarily change the area where you are
using your camcorder
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
z OFF
Not during daylight saving time
During daylight saving time
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
ON
BEEP
z MELODY
To output the melody when you start/ stop
recording or when an unusual condition occurs
on your camcorder
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
NORMAL
OFF
To output the beep instead of the melody
To cancel all sound including shutter sound
COMMANDER
z ON
To activate the Remote Commander supplied
with your camcorder
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
OFF
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid
erroneous remote control operation caused by
other VCR’s remote control
1
* When using the Remote Commander.
2
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.
208
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u
POWER
sw itch
Icon/item
OTHERS
DISPLAY
Mode
Meaning
z LCD
To show the display on the LCD screen and in
the viewfinder
VCR
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
V-OUT/ LCD
To show the display on the TV screen, LCD
screen and in the viewfinder
REC LAMP
z ON
To light up the camera recording lamp at the
front of your camcorder
CAMERA
MEMORY/
NETWORK
OFF
To turn the camera recording lamp off so that
the person is not aware of the recording
VIDEO EDIT
z RETURN
To cancel video editing.
VCR
TAPE
To make a program and perform video editing
(p. 89)
MEMORY
To make program and perform MPEG editing
(p. 151)
Note
If you press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu
settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when
your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.
When recording a close subject
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend that you
set REC LAMP to OFF.
In more than five minutes after removing the pow er supply
The WHT BAL, FLASH LVL, HiFi SOUND, AUDIO MIX and COMMANDER settings
are returned to their default settings.
Other menu settings are held in memory even when the battery is removed.
209
— Tro u b le sh o o t in g —
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct
t ro u b le
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to
troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power supply and
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If “C:ss:ss”
appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 217.
In t h e re co rd in g
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
• The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.
c Set it to CAMERA (p. 26).
START/ STOP does not operate.
• The tape has run out.
c Rewind the cassette or insert a new one (p. 23, 44).
• The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.
c Use a new cassette or slide the tab (p. 23).
• The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).
• While being operated when the POWER switch is set to
CAMERA, your camcorder has been in the standby for
more than five minutes.
The power goes off.
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to
CAMERA.
• The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.
c Install a charged battery pack.
• PHOTO REC is set to TAPE in the menu settings.
c Set it to MEMORY (p. 201).
You cannot record still images on a
“Memory Stick” in the tape recording
or tape recording standby.
• PHOTO REC is set to MEMORY in the menu settings.
c Set it to TAPE (p. 201).
You cannot record still images on a
tape.
• The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.
c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 30).
The image on the viewfinder screen
is not clear.
• STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.
The SteadyShot does not work.
c Set it to ON (p. 201).
• The setting is the manual focus.
The autofocusing does not work.
c Set FOCUS to the autofocus (p. 69).
• Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.
c Adjust for manual focusing (p. 69).
210
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The picture does not appear in the
viewfinder.
• The LCD panel is open.
c Close the LCD panel (p. 28).
A vertical band appears when you
shoot a subject such as lights or a
candle flame against a dark
background.
• The contrast between the subject and background is too
high. This is not a malfunction.
A vertical band appears when you
shoot a very bright subject.
• This is not a malfunction.
Some tiny white, red, blue or green
spots appear on the screen.
• Slow shutter, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter is
activated. This is not a malfunction.
An unknown picture is displayed on
the screen.
• If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to
CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu
settings without a cassette and a “Memory Stick” inserted,
your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration.
c Insert a cassette or a “Memory Stick” and the
demonstration stops.
You can also cancel DEMO MODE (p. 207).
The picture is recorded in incorrect or • NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.
unnatural colors.
c Set it to OFF (p. 34).
The picture appears too bright, and
the subject does not appear on the
screen.
• NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place.
c Set it to OFF (p. 34).
• The backlight is active.
c Set it off (p. 34).
The click of the shutter does not
sound.
• BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 208).
Black bands appear when you
record TV or computer screen.
• Set the STEADYSHOT in the menu settings to OFF
(p. 201).
An external flash (optional) does not
work.
• The power of the external flash is off or the power supply
is not installed.
c Turn on the external flash or install the power supply.
• Two or more external flashes (optional) are attached.
c Only one external flash (optional) can be attached.
(continued on the following page)
211
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
In t h e p la yb a ck
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
• The POWER switch is not set to VCR.
c Set it to VCR (p. 40).
The tape does not move when a
video control button is pressed.
• The cassette has run out of tape.
The playback button does not work.
c Rewind the tape (p. 40).
• The video heads may be dirty.
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)
(p. 229).
There are horizontal lines on the
picture, or the playback picture is not
clear or does not appear.
• The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2
in the menu settings.
No sound or only a low sound is
heard when playing back a tape.
c Set it to STEREO (p. 202).
• The volume is turned to minimum.
c Turn up the volume (p. 40).
• AUDIO MIX is set to ST2 in the menu settings.
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 202).
• The cassette has no cassette memory.
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 81).
• CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON (p. 205).
During displaying the recorded date,
date search does not work.
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
(p. 82).
• The cassette has no cassette memory.
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 80).
• CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON (p. 205).
The title search does not work.
• There is no title in the tape.
c Superimpose the titles (p. 110).
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions
(p. 80).
• AUDIO MIX is set to the ST1 side in the menu settings.
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 109).
The new sound added to the
recorded tape is not heard.
• TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.
The title is not displayed.
c Set it to ON (p. 205).
212
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
In t h e re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
• The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).
The power does not turn on.
• The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.
c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 19).
• The cassette was ejected after recording when using a
cassette without cassette memory (p. 38).
The end search does not work.
• You have not recorded on the new cassette yet (p. 39).
• The tape has a blank portion at the beginning or midway
(p. 38).
The end search does not work
correctly.
• The operating temperature is too low.
• The battery pack is not fully charged.
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be
recharged.
The battery pack is quickly
discharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).
• You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or
cold environment for a long time.
The battery remaining time indicator
does not indicate the correct time.
• The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be
recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).
• The battery is not fully charged.
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication
on the battery remaining indicator is correct (p. 16).
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication
on the battery remaining battery time indicator is correct
(p. 16).
The power goes off although the
battery remaining time indicator
indicates that the battery pack has
enough power to operate.
• The power supply is disconnected.
c Connect it firmly (p. 15, 19).
• The battery is dead.
The cassette cannot be removed from
the holder.
c Use a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).
• Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).
The % and Z indicators flash and no
functions except for cassette ejection
work.
• The gold-plated connector of the cassette is dirty or dusty.
c Clean the gold-plated connector (p. 222).
indicator does not appear when
using a cassette with cassette
memory.
• The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape
indicator (p. 206).
Remaining tape indicator is not
displayed.
(continued on the following page)
213
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
• The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY/ NETWORK
(DCR-TRV50 only).
The “Memory Stick” does not
function.
c Set it to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)
(p. 126).
• The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.
c Insert a “Memory Stick” (p. 119).
• The “Memory Stick” has already been full.
c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 168).
• The “Memory Stick” formatted incorrectly is inserted.
c Format the “Memory Stick” or use another “Memory
Stick” (p. 119, 204).
Recording does not function.
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 117).
• The image is protected.
The image cannot be deleted.
c Cancel image protection (p. 167).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 117).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
You cannot format the “Memory
Stick”.
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 117).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
Deleting all the images cannot be
carried out.
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 117).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 117).
You cannot protect the image.
• INDEX screen is not displayed.
c Press INDEX to display the INDEX screen and protect
the image (p. 167).
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 117).
You cannot write a print mark on
the still image.
• INDEX screen is not displayed.
c The print marks cannot be written to the single screen
(p. 171).
• The “Memory Stick” is full.
c Delete unnecessary print marks and write a print mark
again (p. 168).
• You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.
c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture.
• The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
The photo save does not work.
LOCK.
c Release the lock (p. 117).
• You may not be able to play back images in actual size
when you try to play back images recorded by other
equipment. This is not a malfunction.
You cannot play back images in
actual size.
• Your camcorder cannot play back some images processed
with a computer (The file name will blink).
You cannot play back image data.
• If you record images with any other equipment, the
images may not play back normally on your camcorder.
214
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Ot h e rs
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The title is not recorded.
• The cassette has no cassette memory.
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 110).
• The cassette memory is full.
c Erase unwanted titles (p. 112).
• The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not
visible (p. 23).
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions.
c Superimpose the title to recorded positions (p. 110).
The cassette label is not recorded.
• The cassette has no cassette memory.
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 115).
• The cassette memory is full.
c Erase unwanted data (p. 112).
• The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red mark is not visible
(p. 23).
Digital program editing to a tape
does not function.
• The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.
c Check the connection and set the input selector on the
VCR again (p. 89)
• The camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other
than Sony using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).
c Set it to IR (p. 94).
• You have attempted to set a program on a blank portion of
the tape.
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 97).
• The camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.
c Adjust the synchronization (p. 95).
• The IR SETUP code is incorrect.
c Set the correct code (p. 91).
Digital program editing to a
“Memory Stick” does not function.
• Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is
attempted.
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 151).
The Remote Commander supplied
with your camcorder does not work.
• COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON (p. 208).
• Something is blocking the infrared rays.
c Remove the obstacle.
• The batteries are inserted with + and – incorrectly
matching + and – inside the battery compartment.
c Insert the batteries correctly (p. 243).
• The batteries are dead.
c Insert new ones (p. 243).
The picture from a TV or VCR does
not appear even when your
camcorder is connected to output on
the TV or VCR.
• DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings.
c Set it to LCD (p. 209).
(continued on the following page)
215
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le
Symptom
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
The melody or beep sounds for
five seconds.
• Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).
• Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate
your camcorder.
You cannot charge the battery pack.
• The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).
c Set it to OFF (CHG) (p. 16).
While charging the battery pack, no
indicator appears, the indicator
flashes in the display window.
• The battery pack is not properly installed.
c Install it properly (p. 15).
• Something is wrong with the battery pack.
c Please contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility.
No function works though the
power is on.
• Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or
remove the battery, then reconnect it in about one minute.
Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press
the RESET button using a sharp-pointed object (If you
press the RESET button, all the settings including the date
and time return to their defaults.) (p. 15, 19, 240).
When you set the POWER switch to
VCR or OFF (CHG), if you move
your camcorder, you may hear a
clattering sound from inside your
camcorder.
• This is because some functions use a linear mechanism.
Your camcorder is not malfunctioning.
The buttons do not appear on the
touch panel.
• The DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button is pressed.
c Press the LCD screen lightly.
c Press the DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button on your
camcorder or the DISPLAY button on the Remote
Commander (p. 42).
The buttons on the LCD screen do
not work.
• Adjust the screen (CALIBRATION) (p. 230).
• The mirror mode is activated.
This is not a malfunction.
The indicators appear mirror-
reversed in the viewfinder or on the
TV screen.
• The USB cable was connected before installation of the
USB driver was completed.
Image data cannot be transferred by
the USB connection.
c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and re-install the USB
driver (p. 179, 182).
• USBCONNECT is set to PTP in the menu settings when
the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-
TRV50 only).
c Set it to NORMAL (p. 207).
• Moisture has started to condense in your camcorder
(p. 228).
The cassette cannot be removed
even if the cassette lid is open.
216
Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display
function.
LCD scre e n , vie w fin d e r o r
d isp la y w in d o w
This function displays the current state of your
camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a
letter and figures) on the screen. If a 5-digit code is
displayed, check the following list of codes. The
last two digits (indicated by ss) differ depending
on the state of your camcorder.
C:21:00
Self-diagnosis display
• C:ss:ss
You can service your camcorder
yourself.
• E:ss:ss
Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
Five-digit display
Cause and/or Corrective Actions
• You are using a battery pack that is not an
C:04:ss
“InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.
c Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 18, 223).
C:21:ss
• Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).
C:22:ss
• The video heads are dirty.
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)
(p. 229).
C:31:ss
C:32:ss
• A malfunction other than the above that you can service
has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate
your camcorder.
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power
supply, operate your camcorder.
E:20:ss
E:61:ss
E:62:ss
E:91:ss
• A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony
service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code
(example: E:61:10).
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times,
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.
217
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s
If indicators and messages appear on the screen or in the display window, check the
following:
See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information.
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs
100–0001
C:21:00
100-0001 Warning indicator as to file
Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”
Slow flashing:
formatting*
• The file is corrupted.
Fast flashing:
• The file is unreadable.
• “Memory Stick” is not formatted correctly
• You are trying to use the MEMORY MIX on a
(p. 204).
moving picture (p. 139).
• The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted
(p. 117).
C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 217).
Q Warning indicator as to tape
Slow flashing:
• The tape is near the end.
• No cassette is inserted.*
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is
exposed (red) (p. 23).*
E The battery is dead or nearly dead
Slow flashing:
• The battery is nearly dead.
Depending on the operating conditions,
environment and battery condition, the E
indicator may flash even if there are
approximately five to 10 minutes remaining.
Fast flashing:
• The cassette has run out of tape.*
Fast flashing:
• The battery is dead (p. 16).
Z You need to eject the cassette*
Slow flashing:
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is
% Moisture condensation has occurred*
Fast flashing:
• Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,
and leave it for about one hour with the
cassette compartment open (p. 228).
exposed (red) (p. 23).
Fast flashing:
• Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 228).
• The cassette has run out of tape.
• The self-diagnosis display function is
activated (p. 217).
Warning indicator as to cassette
memory*
Slow flashing:
• No cassette with cassette memory is inserted
(p. 220).
- The image is protected*
Slow flashing:
• The image is protected (p. 167).
Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”
Slow flashing:
• No “Memory Stick” is inserted.
Warning indicator as to the flash
Slow flashing:
• During charging
Fast flashing*:
• The “Memory Stick” is not readable on your
camcorder (p. 117).
• The image cannot be recorded on “Memory
Stick”.
Fast flashing:
• The self-diagnosis display function is
activated (p. 217).*
• There is something wrong with the built-in
flash or the external flash (optional).
Warning indicator as to recording of
still image
Slow image:
• The still image cannot be recorded on a tape
or a “Memory Stick” (p. 47, 52).
* You hear the melody or beep.
218
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s
• CLOCK SET
Set the date and time (p. 20).
Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (p. 18).
• FOR “InfoLITHIUM”
BATTERY ONLY
•
•
•
CLEANING CASSETTE** The video heads are dirty (p. 229).
FULL
16BIT
The cassette memory is full.*
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 206).* You cannot
dub new audio.
•
•
•
REC MODE
TAPE
REC MODE is set to LP (p. 206).* You cannot dub
new audio.
There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot
dub new audio.
“i.LINK” CABLE
The i.LINK cable is connected (p. 109).* You cannot
dub new audio.
•
•
FULL
The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 129).*
-
The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to
LOCK (p. 117).*
•
NO FILE
No still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick”
(p. 157).*
•
•
NO MEMORY STICK
AUDIO ERROR
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.*
You are trying to record an image with sound that
cannot be recorded by your camcorder on “Memory
Stick” (p. 148).*
•
•
MEMORY STICK ERROR
FORMAT ERROR
The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 119).*
The “Memory Stick” is not recognized. Check the
format (p. 204).*
•
•
•
- DIRECTORY ERROR
PLAY ERROR
There are more than two of the same directories
(p. 157).*
The image cannot be played back. Reinsert the
“Memory Stick,” then play back the image again.
REC ERROR
Check the input signal before retrying recording
(p. 138, 150).*
• COPY INHIBIT
The tape contains copyright control signals for
copyright protection of software (p. 221).*
• Q Z TAPE END
The tape has reached its end.*
Insert a cassette.*
• Q NO TAPE
•
NO PRINT MARK
You selected MARKED in 9PIC PRINT on the touch
panel using a “Memory Stick” containing no image
with a print mark. (p. 173)*
•
NO STILL IMAGE FILE
You selected MULTI in 9PIC PRINT on the touch
panel using a “Memory Stick” containing no still
image. (p. 173)*
• DELETING
You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images
on “Memory Stick.”*
• FORMATTING
You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a
“Memory Stick.”*
•
NOW CHARGING
Charging an external flash (optional) does not work
correctly.*
* You hear the melody or beep.
**The x indicator and “
another on the screen.
CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after
219
— Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —
Usa b le ca sse t t e s
Se le ct in g ca sse t t e t yp e s
You can use
Digital8,
mini DV cassettes only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm,
Hi8,
VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHS,
S-VHSC, Betamax,
ED Betamax,
DV or
MICRO MV cassette.
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette
memory. Cassettes with cassette memory have the (Cassette Memory) mark.
We recommend that you use cassette with cassette memory.
IC memory is mounted on this type of cassette. Your camcorder can read and write
data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory.
The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the
tape. If the tape has a blank portion at the beginning or between recorded portions,
titles may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly.
Perform the following to prevent a blank portion from being made on the tape.
Press END SEARCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the
next recording if you operate the following:
– You have ejected the cassette while recording.
– You have played back the tape.
– You have used the edit search.
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the
beginning to the end of the tape as described above.
The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder
without a cassette memory on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory.
mark on the cassette
The memory capacity of cassettes marked with
is 4Kbit. Your camcorder can
accommodate tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16Kbit. 16Kbit cassettes are
marked with
.
This is the mini DV mark.
This is the Cassette Memory mark.
These are trademarks.
220
Usa b le ca sse t t e s
Co p yrig h t sig n a l
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck
Using any other video camera recorder, you cannot record on tape that has recorded
copyright control signals for copyright protection of software which is played back on
your camcorder.
Wh e n yo u re co rd
You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals
for copyright protection of software.
“COPY INHIBIT” appears on the screen or on the TV screen if you try to record such
software.
Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.
Au d io m o d e
12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in
stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be
adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback.
Both sounds can be played back.
16-bit mode: New audio cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in
high quality. Moreover, your camcorder can also play back sound
recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape
recorded in the 16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on screen.
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck a d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e
When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi
SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 202).
Sound from speaker
HiFi SOUND
mode
Playing back
a stereo tape
Playing back a dual
sound track tape
Main sound and
sub sound
STEREO
Stereo
1
2
Left sound
Main sound
Sub sound
Right sound
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.
221
Usa b le ca sse t t e s
No t e s o n t h e ca sse t t e
Wh e n a ffixin g a la b e l o n t h e ca sse t t e
Be sure to affix a label only at the locations illustrated below [a ] to prevent malfunction
of your camcorder.
Aft e r u sin g t h e ca sse t t e
Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it upright.
Wh e n t h e ca sse t t e m e m o ry d o e s n o t w o rk
Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of the cassette may be dirty or dusty.
Cle a n in g t h e g o ld -p la t e d co n n e ct o r
If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is dirty or dusty, the remaining tape
indicator is sometimes not displayed correctly, and you may not be able to operate
functions using cassette memory. Clean the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool
swab, about every 10 times that the cassette is ejected. [b ]
Do not affix a label
along this border.
[b ]
[a ]
222
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck
Wh a t is t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck?
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for
communicating information related to operating conditions between the battery pack
and an optional AC adaptor/ charger.
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack calculates the power consumption according to the
operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in
minutes. With an AC adaptor/ charger (optional), the remaining battery time and
charging time are displayed.
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
• Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.
• We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until FULL appears in the display window, indicating that
the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge the battery outside of this temperature
range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack.
• After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your
camcorder or remove the battery pack.
Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
• Battery pack performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time
that the battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We recommend the following to
ensure longer battery pack use:
– Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder
immediately before you start taking shots.
– Use the large-capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91,
optional).
• Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently operating playback, fast forward or
rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large-capacity
battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91, optional).
• Be sure to turn off the power switch when not taking shots or playing back on your
camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is in the standby
or playback pause.
• Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,
and make trial recordings before taking the actual recording.
• Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r
• If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the
battery pack has enough power to operate, fully charge the battery pack again so that
the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that
the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is
frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate
recording time.
• The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes
depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even
if the remaining battery time is about five to 10 minutes.
(Continued on the following page)
223
Ab o u t t h e “ In fo LITHIUM” b a t t e ry p a ck
Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck
• If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per
year to maintain proper function.
1. Fully charge the battery.
2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.
3. Remove the battery from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place.
• To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in the recording
standby until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.
Ba t t e ry life
• The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and
more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a
probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new
battery pack.
• The battery life varies according to how it is stored and operating conditions and
environment for each battery pack.
224
Ab o u t i.LINK
The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV input/ output jack. This section
describes the i.LINK standard and its features.
Wh a t is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other
data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling
other equipment.
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible
applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy
chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that
this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected
equipment.
Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the
characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations
and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.
Note
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK
cable (DV cable). When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having
two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the operating instructions of the
equipment to be connected.
Ab o u t t h e n a m e “ i.LINK”
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY,
and is a trademark approved by many corporations.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers.
i.LINK b a u d ra t e
i.LINK’s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum
baud rates are defined:
S100 (approx. 100Mbps*)
S200 (approx. 200Mbps)
S400 (approx. 400Mbps)
The baud rate is listed under “Specifications” in the operating instructions of each
equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment.
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is
“S100”.
When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the
baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.
*What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or
received in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps means that 100 megabits
of data can be sent in one second.
225
Ab o u t i.LINK
i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it
For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having
DV jacks, see page 88 and 102.
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV) compatible equipment made by
SONY (e.g. VAIO series personal computer) other than video equipment.
Before connecting this unit to a personal computer, make sure that application software
supported by this unit is already installed on the personal computer.
For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating
instructions of the equipment to be connected.
Re q u ire d i.LINK ca b le
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).
i.LINK and are trademarks.
226
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d
Countries and areas where you can use network functions are restricted. For details,
refer to the separate Network Operating Instructions. (DCR-TRV50 only)
You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor
supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz.
Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if necessary, depending on the
design of the wall outlet [b ].
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C
[a ]
[b ]
Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback
picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with the AUDIO/ VIDEO input
jack.
The following shows TV color systems used overseas.
NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,
Venezuela, etc.
PAL system
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,
United Kingdom etc.
PAL-M system
Brazil
PAL-N system
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
SECAM system
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
227
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d
p re ca u t io n s
Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may
condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state,
the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not
operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep and the %
indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted
in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.
If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d
None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your
camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette lid open. Your camcorder
can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on
again.
If moisture starts to condense, your camcorder sometimes cannot detect condensation.
If this happens, the cassette is sometimes not ejected for 10 seconds after the cassette lid
is opened. This is not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid until the cassette is
ejected.
Note on moisture condensation
Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm
place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:
• You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by heating device.
• You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place
outside.
• You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.
• You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humid place.
How to prevent moisture condensation
When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your
camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature
inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).
228
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n
Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d s
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video heads
may be dirty when:
• Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.
• Playback pictures do not move.
• Playback pictures do not appear.
• The x indicator and “ CLEANING CASSETTE” message appear one after another,
or the x indicator flashes on the screen during recording.
If the above problem [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the
Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above
problem persists, repeat cleaning.
[a ]
[b ]
[c]
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].
Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n
If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the Cleaning
cloth (supplied) to clean the LCD screen. When you use the LCD Cleaning Kit
(optional), do not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the LCD screen. Clean the LCD
screen with cleaning paper moistened with the liquid.
229
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n (CALIBRATION)
The buttons on the touch panel may not work correctly. If this happens, follow the
procedure below.
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
(2) Eject the cassette from your camcorder, then disconnect any connecting cable
from your camcorder.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on
your camcorder, then keep pressing DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL for about five
seconds.
(4) Follow the procedure below using an object such as the corner of a “Memory
Stick” supplied with your camcorder.
You can use the supplied stylus for this operation (DCR-TRV50 only).
1 Touch
2 Touch
3 Touch
at the upper left corner.
at the lower right corner.
in the middle of the screen.
CALIBRATE
CALIBRATE
CALIBRATE
PB
INDEX
FN
Note
If you do not press the right spot, always returns to the position at the upper left
corner. In this case, start from step 4 again.
230
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry
Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery so that the date, time and other
settings are retained even when the POWER switch is turned off. The built-in
rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The
battery, however, will become discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder.
It will be completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your
camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not
affect camcorder operation. To retain the date, time, and other information, charge the
battery if the battery is discharged.
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:
• Connect your camcorder to house current using the AC power adaptor supplied with
your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the power switch turned off for more
than 24 hours.
• Or, install a charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with
the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.
Pre ca u t io n s
Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n
• Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).
• For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating
instructions.
• If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.
• Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.
• Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.
• Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so
might cause heat to build up inside.
• Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.
• Do not press the LCD screen with sharp objects other than the stylus supplied. (DCR-
TRV50 only)
• If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD
screen. This is not a malfunction.
• While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a
malfunction.
On h a n d lin g t a p e s
• Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are
used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.
• Do not open the cassette protect cover or touch the tape.
• Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with
a soft cloth.
231
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Ca m co rd e r ca re
• Remove the cassette, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and
VCR sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is
not to be used for a long time.
• Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,
remove them with a soft cloth.
• Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with
a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the
finish.
• Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause
your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.
AC p o w e r a d a p t o r
• Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using it for a long time. To
disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.
• Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or
damaged.
• Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage
the cord and may cause fire or electric shock.
• Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the
connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.
• Always keep metal contacts clean.
• Do not disassemble the unit.
• Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.
• While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers
and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and
video operation.
• The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Do not place the unit in locations that are:
– Extremely hot or cold
– Dusty or dirty
– Very humid
– Vibrating
Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s
• Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instances:
– When there are fingerprints on the lens surface
– In hot or humid locations
– When the lens is used in environments such as the seaside
• Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.
To prevent mold from growing, periodically perform the above.
We recommend turning on and operating the video camera recorder about once per
month to keep the video camera recorder in an optimum state for a long time.
232
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s
Ba t t e ry p a ck
• Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.
• To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into
contact with the battery terminals.
• Keep the battery pack away from fire.
• Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a car
parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.
• Keep the battery pack dry.
• Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.
• Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.
• Attach the battery pack to the video equipment securely.
• Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.
No t e s o n d ry b a t t e rie s
To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:
– Be sure to insert the batteries with the + and – correctly matching the + and – inside
the battery compartment.
– Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
– Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.
– Do not use different types of batteries.
– Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.
– Do not use leaking batteries.
If batteries are leaking
• Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.
• If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.
• If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a
doctor.
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.
233
Sp e cifica t io n s
Color temperature
Wire le ss co m m u n ica t io n s
Vid e o ca m e ra
re co rd e r
Auto, HOLD (Hold), nIndoor
(3 200 K), Outdoor (5 800 K)
Minimum illumination
7 lx (lux) (F 1.8)
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*
* Objects unable to be seen due to
the dark can be shot with
infrared lighting.
(DCR-TRV50 only)
Communications system
Bluetooth standard Ver.1.1
Max. baud rate1) 2)
Approx. 723 kbps
Output
Bluetooth standard Power Class 2
Communications distance2)
Max. wireless distance Approx. 10
m (393 3/ 4 in.) (When connecting
to BTA-NW1)
Compatible Bluetooth profile3)
Generic Access Profile
Dial-up Networking Profile
Operating frequency band
2.4 GHz band (2.400 GHz –
2.483 5 GHz)
Syst e m
Video recording system
2 rotary heads
Helical scanning system
Audio recording system
Rotary heads, PCM system
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)
Video signal
NTSC color, EIA standards
Usable cassette
Mini DV cassette with the
mark printed
Tape speed
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/ s
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/ s
Recording/playback time
(using cassette DVM60)
SP: 1 hour
In p u t /Ou t p u t co n n e ct o rs
S video input/output
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,
75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,
75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced
Audio/Video input/output
AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p,
75 Ω (ohms), unbalanced, sync
negative
327 mV, (at output impedance
more than 47 kΩ (kilohms))
Output impedance with less than
2.2 kΩ (kilohms)/ Stereo minijack
(ø 3.5 mm)
1)
Max. baud rate of Bluetooth
standard Ver.1.1
Varies according to the distance
between communicating
devices, presence of obstacles,
radiowave conditions, and other
factors.
2)
LP: 1.5 hours
Fastforw ard/rew ind time
(using cassette DVM60)
When using the battery pack:
Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds
When using the AC power
adaptor:
3)
Input impedance more than
47 kΩ (kilohms)
DV input/output
4-pin connector
Headphone jack
This is a specification matched
to specific usage requirements
between Bluetooth compatible
devices. It is laid down in the
Bluetooth standards.
Approx. 1 min. and 45 seconds
View finder
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)
LANC jack
Electric viewfinder (color)
Image device
Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)
USB jack
4.5 mm (1/ 4 type) CCD (Charge
Coupled Device)
mini-B
MIC jack
Gross: Approx. 1 550 000 pixels
Effective (still):
Approx. 1 390 000 pixels
Effective (moving):
Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance
with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output
impedance 6.8 kΩ (kilohms) (ø 3.5
mm)
Approx. 970 000 pixels
Lens
Stereo type
Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar
Combined power zoom lens
Filter diameter: 37 mm
(1 1/ 2 in)
10× (Optical), 120× (Digital)
F = 1.8 ~ 2.2
LCD scre e n
Picture
8.8 cm (3.5 type)
72.2 × 50.4 mm (2 4/ 5 × 2 in.)
Total dot number
246 400 (1 120 × 220)
Focal length
4.2 – 42 mm (3/ 16 – 1 11/ 16 in.)
When converted to a 35 mm still
camera
In CAMERA:
48 – 480 mm (1 15/ 16 – 19 in.)
In MEMORY:
40 – 400 mm (1 5/ 8 – 15 3/ 4 in.)
234
Sp e cifica t io n s
Ge n e ra l
Ba t t e ry p a ck
Pow er requirements
7.2 V (battery pack)
8.4 V (AC power adaptor)
Average pow er consumption
(w hen using the battery pack)
During camera recording using
LCD
4.5 W
Viewfinder
3.4 W
Maximum output voltage
DC 8.4 V
Output voltage
DC 7.2 V
Capacity
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
Dimensions (approx.)
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.)
(w/ h/ d)
Mass (approx.)
76 g (2.7 oz)
Type
Operating temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Storage temperature
–20°C to + 60°C
Lithium ion
(–4°F to + 140°F)
Dimensions (Approx.)
72 × 91 × 168 mm
(2 7/ 8 × 3 5/ 8 × 6 5/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)
Mass (Approx.)
700 g (1 lb 8 oz)
main unit only
“ Me m o ry St ick”
Memory
Flash memory
8MB: MSA-8A
Operating voltage
2.7 – 3.6 V
Pow er consumption
Approx. 45 mA in the operating
mode
Approx. 130 µA in the standby
mode
800 g (1 lb 12 oz)
including the battery pack
NP-FM50, cassette DVM60 and
lens cap
Supplied accessories
See page 14.
Dimensions (approx.)
50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm
(2 × 1/ 8 × 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)
Mass (approx.)
4 g (0.14 oz)
AC p o w e r a d a p t o r
Pow er requirements
100 – 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz
Pow er consumption
23 W
Design and specifications are
Output voltage
subject to change without notice.
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the
operating mode
Operating temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Storage temperature
–20°C to + 60°C
(–4°F to + 140°F)
Dimensions (approx.)
125 × 39 × 62 mm
(5 × 1 9/ 16 × 2 1/ 2 in.) (w/ h/ d)
excluding projecting parts
Mass (approx.)
280 g (9.8 oz)
excluding power cord
235
— Qu ick Re fe re n ce —
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
Ca m co rd e r
8
9
q;
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1Flash (p. 49, 130)
6Microphone
2Focus ring (p. 69)
7Remote sensor
3Lens
8View finder (p. 30)
9Display w indow (p. 16)
0HOLOGRAM AF emitter (p. 132)
4Camera recording lamp (p. 26)
5Infrared rays emitter (p. 34, 92)
Note on the Carl Zeiss lens
Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce fine images.
The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and
Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF# measurement system for video camera and
offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.
#
MTF Stands for Modulation Transfer Function.
The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject coming into the lens.
236
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
qj
qk
ql
qa
w;
qs
wa
qd
qf
qg
qh
qaPHOTO button (p. 47, 52, 126)
qsLOCK sw itch (p. 26)
qdDC IN jack cover
qjEDITSEARCH button (p. 38)
qkNIGHTSHOT sw itch (p. 34)
ql
(Bluetooth) lamp (DCR-TRV50 only)
(p. 197)
qfDC IN jack (p. 19)
w;SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S button
qgSTART/STOP button (p. 26)
qhPOWER sw itch (p. 26)
(p. 34)
waStylus (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198)
237
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
wh
wj
ws
wd
wk
wl
wf
e;
ea
es
ed
ef
wg
wsPow er zoom lever (p. 31, 77, 164)
wdBATT release button (p. 15)
wfHooks for shoulder strap
wg“Memory Stick” slot (p. 119)
wh (USB) jack (p. 174)
eaMIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (red)
Connect an external microphone
(optional). This jack also accepts a
“plug-in-power” microphone.
esS VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 46, 86, 137, 149)
edi (headphones) jack (green)
When you use headphones, the speaker
on your camcorder is silent.
wj
wk DV IN/OUT jack (p. 88, 102, 138, 150)
wl (LANC) jack (blue)
e;Jack cover (p. 46)
(flash) button (p. 49, 130)
efAUDIO/VIDEO jack (yellow ) (p. 46, 86,
137, 149)
238
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
eg
eh
ek
el
r;
ra
ej
REW
REC
PLAY
STOP
FF
PAUSE
egIntelligent accessory shoe (p. 106)
ehLCD/Touch panel screen (p. 24, 29, 120)
ejSpeaker
raVideo control buttons
x STOP (stop)
m REW (rewind)
N PLAY (playback)
M FF (fastforward)
X PAUSE (pause)
z REC (record)
ekVOLUME buttons (p. 40)
elDISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button (p. 42)
r;MENU button (p. 199)
Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe
• The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video
light or microphone.
• The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the
power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the
accessory for further information.
• The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory
securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten
the screw.
• To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the
accessory.
239
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
rj
rk
rs
rd
rf
rg
rh
rl
t;
ta
rsOPEN button (p. 26)
rdFOCUS sw itch (p. 69)
rfRESET button (p. 216)
rgFADER button (p. 58)
rhBACK LIGHT button (p. 34)
rjView finder lens adjustment lever
(p. 30)
rkNETWORK button (DCR-TRV50 only)
(p. 197)
rlSEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 199)
t;PROGRAM AE button
taEXPOSURE button (p. 67)
240
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
th
tj
ts
td
tk
tl
y;
tf
tg
tsAccess lamp
tkLens cap (p. 26)
tlCassette lid (p. 23)
y;Tripod receptacle
tdBattery pack (p. 15)
tf
OPEN/EJECT lever (p. 23)
Make sure that the length of the tripod
screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/ 32 inch).
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod
securely, and the screw may damage
your camcorder.
tgCassette compartment
thGrip strap
tjHolder (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198)
Fastening the grip strap
Fasten the grip strap firmly.
2
3
1
4
241
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r
The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder
function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.
8
1
9
0
qa
qs
2
3
4
5
qd
6
7
qf
1PHOTO button (p. 47, 52, 126)
2DISPLAY button (p. 42)
3Memory control buttons
4SEARCH MODE button (p. 80, 81, 83)
5Video control buttons (p. 44)
6REC button
8Transmitter
Point toward the remote sensor to
control your camcorder after turning on
your camcorder.
9ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 79)
q;START/STOP button (p. 26)
qaDATA CODE button (p. 42)
qsPow er zoom button (p. 31)
qd./> buttons (p. 80, 81, 83)
qfAUDIO DUB button (p. 108)
7MARK button (p. 97)
242
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and – on the batteries to
the + and – in the battery compartment.
Notes on the Remote Commander
• Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.
• Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR
2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR
with black paper.
243
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls
Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs
LCD scre e n a n d Vie w fin d e r
Disp la y w in d o w
qd
qf
qg
qh
qj
qk
ql
w;
1
2
3
4
5
wl
:
:
120min
STILL
STBY
0 12 34
12min
–
+
6
ZERO SET
MEMORY
END
wa
ws
:
16 9WIDE
NEG. ART
wk
B
SEARCH
AUTO
60 AWB
F1.8 9db
DV IN
16BIT
100–0001
wd
wf
7
8
9
0
qa
qs
wg
wh
wj
1Cassette memory (p. 33, 220)
qkWarning (p. 218)
2Remaining battery time (p. 33)
qlTape counter (p. 33)/Time code
(p. 33)/Self-diagnosis (p. 217)/Tape
photo (p. 52)/Memory photo (p. 126)/
Image number (p. 157)
3Zoom (p. 31)/Exposure (p. 67)/
Data file name (p. 117)
4Digital effect (p. 61, 76)/MEMORY MIX
w;Remaining tape (p. 33)/Memory
(p. 139)/FADER (p. 57)
playback (p. 157)
516:9WIDE (p. 55)
waZERO SET MEMORY (p. 79)
wsEND SEARCH (p. 38)
6Picture effect (p. 60, 75)
7Data code (p. 42)
wdA/V t DV (p. 196)/DV IN (p. 103)
wfAudio mode (p. 206)
8Volume (p. 40)/Date (p. 33)
9PROGRAM AE (p. 64)
0Backlight (p. 34)
wgData file name (p. 117)/Time (p. 33)
whFlash (p. 49, 130)
qaSteadyShot off (p. 201)
qsManual focus/Infinity (p. 69)
qdSelf-timer (p. 37, 51, 134)
qfRecording mode (p. 33)
qgHOLOGRAM AF (p. 132)
This indicator appears only when the
flash is in use.
wjContinuous photo recording (p. 128)
wkRemaining battery time indicator (p.
33)/Tape counter (p. 33)/Memory
counter (p. 33)/Time code indicator (p.
33)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 217)
qhSTBY/REC (p. 33)/Video control mode
(p. 44)/Image size (p. 124)/Image
quality (p. 122)
wlFULL charge indicator (p. 16)
qjNIGHTSHOT (p. 34)/SUPER NIGHTSHOT
(p. 35) COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (p. 35)
244
In d e x
HOLOGRAM AF .................. 132
A, B
R
AC power adaptor .................. 16
Adjusting viewfinder ............. 30
Audio dubbing ...................... 106
AUDIO MIX .......................... 202
Audio mode ........................... 206
Auto red-eye reduction
........................................ 49, 130
AUTO SHTR .......................... 200
A/ V connecting cable
.......... 46, 86, 100, 137, 149, 196
BACK LIGHT .......................... 34
Battery pack ............................. 15
BEEP ....................................... 208
BOUNCE .................................. 57
Recording time ........................ 17
Rec Review .............................. 39
Remaining battery time
indicator ................................ 33
Remaining tape indicator ...... 33
Remote Commander ............ 242
Remote sensor ....................... 236
RESET ..................................... 216
I, J, K, L
i.LINK ..................................... 225
Image protection ................... 167
Image quality ........................ 122
Image size .............................. 124
Index screen ........................... 158
“InfoLITHIUM” battery ...... 223
Infrared rays emitter ......... 34, 92
Insert editing ......................... 104
Intelligent accessory shoe .... 239
Interval recording ................... 72
JPEG ........................................ 117
Labeling a cassette ................ 115
LANC jack ............................. 238
LUMINANCE KEY ................ 61
S
Self-diagnosis display .......... 217
Self-timer recording
.................................. 37, 51, 134
Signal convert function ........ 196
Skip scan .................................. 44
Slide show .............................. 166
Slow playback ......................... 44
SLOW SHUTTER .................... 61
SPOT FOCUS .......................... 71
STEADYSHOT ...................... 201
Stereo tape ............................. 221
STILL ........................................ 61
Sub sound .............................. 221
Super NightShot ..................... 35
S VIDEO jack
C, D
CALIBRATION ..................... 230
Camera chroma key ............. 139
Cassette memory ............ 12, 220
Charging battery ..................... 16
Charging built-in rechargeable
battery ................................. 231
Clock set ................................... 20
Color Slow Shutter ................. 35
Continuous photo recording
.............................................. 128
Data code ................................. 42
Date search .............................. 81
DEMO ..................................... 207
Digital effect ...................... 61, 76
Digital program editing
M, N
Main sound ............................ 221
Manual focus ........................... 69
Memory chroma key ............ 139
Memory luminance key ....... 139
MEMORY MIX ...................... 139
Memory PB ZOOM .............. 164
Memory photo recording .... 126
“Memory Stick” .................... 117
“Memory Stick” recording
capacity ............................... 125
Menu settings ........................ 199
Memory overlap ................... 139
M. FADER ................................ 57
Mirror mode ............................ 32
Moisture condensation ........ 228
MONOTONE .......................... 57
MPEG ..................................... 117
MPEG movie recording ....... 144
MULTI SCRN ........................ 128
NETWORK ............................ 197
Nightshot ................................. 34
NTSC system ......................... 227
.................. 46, 86, 100, 137, 149
T, U, V
Tape counter ............................ 33
Tape PB ZOOM ....................... 77
Tape photo recording ............. 52
Telephoto ................................. 31
Time code ................................. 33
Title ................................. 110, 113
Title search ............................... 80
TRAIL ....................................... 61
Transition ................................. 27
TV color systems ................... 227
USB jack ................................. 180
USB streaming ....................... 177
........................................ 89, 151
DISPLAY .................................. 42
DOT .......................................... 57
Dual sound track tape .......... 221
DV connecting cable
................................ 88, 138, 196
E
EDITSEARCH ......................... 38
END SEARCH ................... 38, 44
EXP BRKTG ........................... 128
Exposure .................................. 67
O, P, Q
W, X, Y, Z
OLD MOVIE ............................ 61
Operation indicators ............ 244
OVERLAP ................................ 57
Photo save .............................. 154
Photo scan ................................ 85
Photo search ............................ 83
Picture effect ...................... 60, 75
Picture search .......................... 44
Playback pause ........................ 44
Playing time ............................. 18
Power zoom ............................. 31
Print mark .............................. 171
PROGRAM AE....................... 64
Warning indicators ............... 218
White balance .......................... 54
Wide-angle .............................. 31
Wide mode .............................. 55
WIPE ......................................... 57
Write-protect tab ............. 23, 117
Zero set memory ..................... 79
Zoom ........................................ 31
F, G, H
FADER ..................................... 57
Fade in/ out .............................. 57
Flash .................................. 49, 130
FLASH MOTION .................... 61
Flexible Spot Meter ................. 68
FOCUS ...................................... 69
Format ............................ 117, 204
Frame recording ...................... 74
Full charge ............................... 16
Grip strap ............................... 241
i (Headphone) jack ............. 238
Heads ...................................... 229
HiFi SOUND ......................... 202
HIGH SPEED ........................ 128
245
Printed on recycled paper.
Printed using VOC (Volatile Organic
Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink.
Sony Corporation Printed in Japan
|